ER model

Openbravo ERP
Version 1.0

Visit us at www.openbravo.com

Preface
This document represents Openbravo’s Entity Relation Diagram (ERD), created with data obtained from the Application Dictionary. The aim of the document is not to get a formal ERD, but to get a complete view of the tables and columns behind the functionalities of Openbravo ERP.

The diagram has been separated into several chapters according to the main functional modules of the ERP. The same table might appear in different chapters but only once in detail. This is done to emphasize the relation among the main tables of the chapter with the rest of the diagram. All the relations are represented among the examples, but those not representative in the chapter have been deleted.

The not implemented columns are those ones that aren’t being used in the ERP. They can be part of deleted functionalities, hidden or not used functionalities or they are about to be developed.

The tables of Openbravo have some common characteristics. All tables must have a unique primary key with columnname like tablename+ ID. The table name has to follow the prefix policy: • A: asset management • AD: application dictionary • C: core functionality • I: import temporary tables and processes • M: material management • FACT: Accounting tables. • GL: general ledger • MA: manufacturing • MRP: material resource • S: service management • CUS, PD, US, ZZ: personal developments. Common columns of all tables: • Created: date of record creation. 2/461

• CreatedBy: id of the user that has created the record. • Updated: date of the last update of the record. • UpdatedBy: id of the user that has commit the last update. • IsActive: logic delete of the record. • AD Client ID: id of the client owner of the record. AD Client ID = 0 is System client for System Administrator use. • AD Org ID: id of the organization owner of the record. AD Org ID = = is Asterisk organization that shares the record to all the organizations of the client.

3/461

Contents
1 Window, Tab and Field 1.1 AD Window . . . . 1.2 AD Tab . . . . . . 1.3 AD Image . . . . . 1.4 AD AuxiliarInput . 1.5 AD FieldGroup . . 1.6 AD Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 15 17 19 19 20 20 23 23 25 28 29 29 30 31 32 32 32 34 35 35 37 37 40 40 42 44 45 47 47 47 50 50 51 51 51 53 53

2 Table and column and attachments 2.1 AD Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 AD Column . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 AD Callout . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 AD Val Rule . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 AD Element . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 C File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.7 AD DataType . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Reference 3.1 AD Reference 3.2 AD Ref List . . 3.3 AD Ref Table . 3.4 AD Ref Search 3.5 AD Ref Search

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Column

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

4 Menu 4.1 AD Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Process, Form and Task 5.1 AD Process . . . . . 5.2 AD Process Para . . 5.3 AD Form . . . . . . 5.4 AD Task . . . . . . . 6 Workflow 6.1 AD Workflow . . . 6.2 AD WF Node . . . 6.3 AD WF Node Trl . 6.4 AD WF NodeNext 7 Tree 7.1 AD 7.2 AD 7.3 AD 7.4 AD

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

TreeNodePR TreeNodeBP TreeNode . . TreeBar . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

4/461

7.5 AD Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6 AD TreeNodeMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Internals: process execution, sequences, messages, log 8.1 AD PInstance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.2 AD PInstance Para . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.3 AD PInstance Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.4 AD Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.5 AD Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.6 AD Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.7 AD TextInterfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.8 AD Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.9 AD Month . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

54 54 55 55 57 57 58 59 60 60 61 62 63 63 65 66 66 68 68 69 70 71 71 72 72 73 73 74 74 75 75 76 77 78 78 81 82 83 83 83 84 84

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . .

9 Model objects mapping 9.1 AD Model Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 AD Model Object Mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Translations 10.1 AD Language . . . . 10.2 AD Window Trl . . . 10.3 AD Process Trl . . . 10.4 AD Tab Trl . . . . . 10.5 AD Element Trl . . . 10.6 AD FieldGroup Trl . 10.7 AD Reference Trl . . 10.8 AD Process Para Trl 10.9 AD Menu Trl . . . . 10.10 AD Message Trl . . 10.11 AD Field Trl . . . . . 10.12 AD TextInterfaces Trl 10.13 AD Task Trl . . . . . 10.14 AD Workflow Trl . . 10.15 AD Form Trl . . . . . 10.16 AD Ref List Trl . . . 10.17 AD WF Node Trl . . 11 Access 11.1 AD 11.2 AD 11.3 AD 11.4 AD 11.5 AD 11.6 AD 11.7 AD 11.8 AD

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

User . . . . . . . . User Roles . . . . Role . . . . . . . . Task Access . . . Window Access . Process Access . Workflow Access . Form Access . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

5/461

11.9 AD Role OrgAccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.10 AD Table Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Country, Region and Location 12.1 C Country . . . . . . . . . . 12.2 C Country Trl . . . . . . . . 12.3 C Region . . . . . . . . . . 12.4 C Location . . . . . . . . .

85 85 86 86 88 89 89 91 91 93 95 97 98 99 99 100 100 102 103 103 105 105 107 107 107 109 116 117 118 118 119 121 123 123

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

13 System, Client, Org and Session info. 13.1 AD System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.2 AD Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3 AD ClientInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.4 AD Org . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.5 AD OrgInfo . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6 AD Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7 AD Preference . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Warehouse, Shipper and Freigth 14.1 M Warehouse . . . . . . . . . 14.2 M Locator . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3 M Warehouse Shipper . . . . 14.4 M Freight . . . . . . . . . . . 14.5 M FreightCategory . . . . . . 14.6 M Shipper . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Business partner 15.1 C Greeting . . . . . 15.2 C Greeting Trl . . . 15.3 C BPartner . . . . . 15.4 C BPartner Location 15.5 C SalesRegion . . . 15.6 C BP Group . . . . 15.7 C BP TaxCategory . 15.8 C BP BankAccount 15.9 AD User . . . . . . . 15.10 InterestArea . . . R 15.11 ContactInterest . . R

Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

16 Payment term 125 16.1 C PaymentTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 16.2 C Paymenttermline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 16.3 C PaymentTerm Trl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

6/461

17 Product 17.1 M Product . . . . . . 17.2 M Product Category 17.3 M Substitute . . . . 17.4 M Product BOM . . 17.5 M Product Customer 17.6 M Product Org . . . 17.7 M Product PO . . . 17.8 M Replenish . . . . 17.9 M Product Template 17.10 Product UOM . . M 17.11 Costing . . . . . . M 17.12 Product Trl . . . . M

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . .

131 131 136 137 138 138 139 140 142 143 143 144 145

18 Unit of Measure 146 18.1 C UOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 18.2 C UOM Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 18.3 C UOM Trl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 19 Attribute 19.1 M Attribute . . . . . . . 19.2 M AttributeSet . . . . . 19.3 M AttributeValue . . . . 19.4 M AttributeUse . . . . . 19.5 M AttributeSetInstance . 19.6 M AttributeInstance . . 20 Pricing 20.1 M PriceList . . . . . . . 20.2 M PriceList Version . . 20.3 M ProductPrice . . . . . 20.4 M DiscountSchema . . 20.5 M DiscountSchemaLine 20.6 M Offer . . . . . . . . . 20.7 M Offer PriceList . . . . 20.8 M Offer BPartner . . . . 20.9 M Offer BP Group . . . 20.10 Offer Prod Cat . . . . M 20.11 Offer Product . . . . M 20.12 Discount . . . . . . . C 20.13 BPartner Discount . . C 150 150 152 152 153 153 154 155 155 157 158 158 159 162 163 163 164 164 164 165 165 167 167 167 169

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

21 Tax 21.1 C TaxCategory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2 C TaxCategory Trl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.3 C Tax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7/461

21.4 C Tax Trl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 21.5 C Tax Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 22 Currency 22.1 C Currency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.2 C Currency Trl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.3 C Conversion Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 173 175 175

23 Document type 177 23.1 C DocType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 23.2 C DocType Trl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 24 Activity, Campaign and Channel 24.1 C Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.2 C Campaign . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.3 C Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Order 25.1 C 25.2 C 25.3 C 25.4 C 25.5 C 182 182 184 185 186 186 188 193 196 196 198 198 200 200 201 203 203 208 209 211 212 213 214 215 216 218 219 220 222 223

Incoterms . . . . Order . . . . . . OrderLine . . . . OrderLine Offer OrderTax . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

26 Purchase specific 26.1 M Requisition . . . 26.2 M RequisitionLine 26.3 M MatchInv . . . . 26.4 M MatchPO . . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

27 Transaction 27.1 M InOut . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2 M InOutLine . . . . . . . . . . 27.3 M Movement . . . . . . . . . 27.4 M MovementLine . . . . . . . 27.5 M Inventory . . . . . . . . . . 27.6 M InventoryLine . . . . . . . 27.7 M Internal Consumption . . . 27.8 M Internal ConsumptionLine 27.9 M Production . . . . . . . . . 27.10 ProductionPlan . . . . . . M 27.11 ProductionLine . . . . . . . M 27.12 Transaction . . . . . . . . . M 27.13 Storage Detail . . . . . . . M 27.14 Storage Pending . . . . . M

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8/461

28 Invoice 28.1 C Invoice . . . . . . . . . . . 28.2 C Invoice Discount . . . . . . 28.3 C InvoiceLine . . . . . . . . . 28.4 C InvoiceLine Offer . . . . . 28.5 C InvoiceLine AcctDimension 28.6 C InvoiceTax . . . . . . . . . 29 Commission 29.1 C Commission . . . 29.2 C CommissionLine . 29.3 C CommissionRun . 29.4 C CommissionAmt . 29.5 C CommissionDetail 30 Rappel 30.1 M Rappel 30.2 M Rappel 30.3 M Rappel 30.4 M Rappel 30.5 M Rappel 30.6 M Rappel

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

224 224 229 229 231 232 232 234 234 236 237 238 239 241 241 243 243 244 244 245 246 246 246 248 249 253 255 255 257 258 259 260 261 261 263 263 264 267 267 270 272

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . Bpartner . . . . . Product . . . . . Productcategory Scale . . . . . . Invoice . . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . . . . .

31 Project 31.1 C ProjectType . . . . . . 31.2 C Phase . . . . . . . . . 31.3 C Task . . . . . . . . . . 31.4 C Project . . . . . . . . 31.5 C ProjectPhase . . . . . 31.6 C ProjectTask . . . . . . 31.7 C ProjectLine . . . . . . 31.8 C Project Vendor . . . . 31.9 C ProjectProposal . . . 31.10 ProjectProposalLine . C 31.11 ProjectProposalTask . C 32 Services 32.1 S ExpenseType . . . 32.2 S TimeType . . . . . 32.3 S TimeExpense . . 32.4 S TimeExpenseLine

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

. . . .

33 Payment management 33.1 C Settlement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2 C Debt Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3 C Glitem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9/461

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 C CashLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DP ManagementLine . .2 C ElementValue . . . . . .6 AD AccountingRpt Element 37 Account Element 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 C PromissoryFormat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34. .10 C 33. . . . . . . . . .1 C BP Group Acct . . .11 C Debt Payment Balancing . . . . . . 36. . . . Year and Period 35. . . . . . . . . . .7 C 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37. . . 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Accounting Schema 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36. . . . . . . .5 C AcctSchema Default . . . . 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37. . . . Remittance Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 C AcctSchema Table . . . . . . . . . . .1 C Bank . . . . .1 C Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 C BankStatementLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320 38. . . . . . 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 C 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 C BP Vendor Acct . . . . . . . . . Remittance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 C Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 C AcctSchema Element . . . . . . . . . RemittanceLine .2 C BP Customer Acct . .1 C Element . . . .4 C PeriodControl . . . . . . . .5 C NonBusinessDay . . 38 Accounting 317 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 C ValidCombination . . . . . . Remittance Type .4 C BankStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 C 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 C Cash . . . . . . . 273 273 274 275 276 276 277 278 280 280 282 283 285 286 288 289 290 291 292 292 292 294 295 295 297 297 299 301 301 302 308 310 310 312 314 314 315 34 Bank and Cash management 34. . . . . . .7 C CashBook . . 35. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36. . .4 C 33. . . . . . . . . 37. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 C 33. . . . 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 C AcctSchema GL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 C AcctSchema . . . . . . . . 35 Calendar. . . .3 C ElementValue Operand 37. . . . 36. . . . . . . . .5 C 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Debt Payment Bal Replace DP Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 C Year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 C ElementValue Trl . . . 321 10/461 . . . . . . . 34. 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 C Charge . . .2 C BankAccount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . 43 Manufacturing: Work Requirement 366 43. . . . . . . .2 MA ProcessPlan Version 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 A Amortization . . . . . . . .1 Fact Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C 38. . . . . . 40. . . C 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 42 Manufacturing: Process Plan 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39. . . . . . . . . . . . .1 A Asset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38. . . . . . . 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C 39 General Ledger and Budget 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 C Budget . . . . . . . 40 Assets 40. . . . . .3 GL Journal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12 Charge Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 328 329 329 330 331 337 337 337 340 342 344 344 347 347 352 352 354 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 A Asset Group . . . . . . . . . . . . 40. . . .8 C BankAccount Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M 38. . . 42. . . . 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 43.3 MA Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . 38. . . . . 38. . . . . . . . . . .11 Asset Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 Project Acct . . . . . . .2 GL JournalBatch . . . . . 38. . . . . . . . . . 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40. . . . . . . . . 41 Accounting Facts 355 41.7 MA SequenceProduct . . . . . . . . . . . A 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38. .1 GL Category . . . . . . . . . . .6 C BudgetLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 C Tax Acct . . . . . . . . . . . 42. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39. . . . . . . . . .4 MA Sequence Employee 42. C 38. . . . . . .6 M Product Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 MA WRPhase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 MA ProcessPlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 11/461 . . . . . . . . . . 359 359 361 361 363 363 364 364 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 A Amortizationline . . . . . . . .5 MA Sequence IC . . . . . . 39.15 Warehouse Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 MA WorkRequirement . . .10 Asset Group Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MA WRPhaseProduct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A 38. .4 C BP Employee Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 MA Sequence Machine . . . . . . .4 GL JournalLine . . . . 366 43. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 AcctSchema Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 C CashBook Acct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 M Product Category Acct 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 Glitem Acct . . .

. . . . . . . . . . 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46. . . .1 MA CCP . . . . . . . . . 48. . . . . . . . .2 MA Machine Cost . . . . . . . .44 Manufacturing: Work Effort 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 MA Measure Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 MA Measure Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MA CCP Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MA PC Test . . . . . . . . 12/461 . 45 Manufacturing: Toolset 45. . . .2 MA Maint Operation . . . . . . 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 M ProductionPlan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 MA Toolset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MA PL InvoiceLine . . . . . . . . . . . . 48. . . 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 MA Maint Scheduled . .2 MA ToolsetProcess . . . . . 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44. . . . . . . . . .1 MA PL Employee . . . . . 46 Manufacturing: Periodic Control 46.4 MA Machine Type . . . . . . . .4 MA Maint Periodicity . . 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 MA ToolsetUsed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47. . . . . . . . . . . .3 MA Toolset Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 MA Periodic Control . 44. . . . . . . 48. . . . . . . . . 49. .7 M Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45. . . . . .2 MA PL IC . 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 MA WEEmployee . . . 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MA Machinestation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 MA Machine . . . . . . . . . . . .4 MA PL Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 MA PC Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Manufacturing: Machine 49. . . 46. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Manufacturing: Critical Control Points 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 371 371 373 373 374 374 375 376 378 379 381 381 381 383 383 385 385 385 387 387 389 389 389 391 392 392 393 393 395 395 397 397 398 398 399 401 401 401 403 404 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 M ProductionLine . . . . . .6 MA Maint Worker . . . . . 47. . . 44. 47. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 MA PC Value . . . . . . . . . . 48 Manufacturing: Maintenance 48. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 MA Measure Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48. 44. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44. . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MA Maint Part .7 MA Measure Values . . . . . .1 MA Maintenance . .6 MA WEIncidence . . . . . . . . .2 MA CCP Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 MA GlobalUse . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 53. . . . . Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SalesForecastLine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 M WH Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 405 405 407 407 408 51 Manufacturing: Indirect Cost 409 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 52 Manufacturing: Incidence 412 52. . . . .2 MA Indirect Cost Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50. . . . . . . . . . Run PurchaseLine . . . . . . . . . .1 C Salary Category 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost . . . .5 MRP 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 56. . . . .8 C Salary Category 54. . . .6 C Salary Category 54. . . . .8 MRP 55. . . . . . . Planner . . . . . . . . .1 MA Costcenter IC . . . . . . .2 MA CostCenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 MA Process . .3 M WH Schedule Product . .1 MA Incidence . . . . .2 C Salary Category 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 MRP 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MRP 55. . . . 416 54 Salary Category 54. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 MA Indirect Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 MA Costcenter Version . . .1 MRP 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 M Locator Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 53 Manufacturing: Work Station 414 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cost . . . . . . . . . . Run ProductionLine Run Purchase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 MRP 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 C Salary Category 54. .50 Manufacturing: Cost Center 50. . . . .4 C Salary Category 54. . . .9 MRP 417 417 417 417 417 417 419 419 419 419 419 420 420 420 422 422 423 423 425 426 427 . . .10 Salary Category C 55 MRP 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 MA CostCenter Machine 50. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429 56. . . . . . . . Cost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 C Salary Category 54. . . . . . . .7 C Salary Category 54. . . . . . . . . . . . PlanningMethodLine Run Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SalesForecast . . . .3 MA Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Warehouse services 429 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 C Salary Category 54. . . .7 MRP 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 MA Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PlanningMethod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 MA Costcenter Employee 50. . . . 431 13/461 . . . . .4 MRP 55. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 M InOutLine Type . . . . .1 AD ImpFormat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58. 58. . . . 58. . . . . . . . . .4 I Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/461 . . . . . . . . 432 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 M WH Period Invoiced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 C ExternalPOS 57. . . . . . . . . . . 58 Import data 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 C ExternalPOS 57. . . . .3 I BPartner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 I Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 C ExternalPOS 57. . . . . . . . . . . . . 434 434 436 437 437 442 442 444 445 447 451 453 458 . . . . .4 M WH Period . .2 AD ImpFormat Row 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 M Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 56. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 57 External POS 57.5 I ElementValue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 I Budgetline . .

• Help: The Help field contains a hint. • AD Image ID: Defines a system image 15/461 . for instance a slection list. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. You cannot share data between Clients.1 Window. Transaction or Query) • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. depending on the tab that is edited. Tab & Field defines the presentation of tables and columns within each window. The auxiliar inputs fix the values of a selected field. For customizations. Tab and Field The Window. • AD Window ID: The Window field identifies a unique Window in the system.1 AD Window The Window table defines each window in the system. For System Admin use only. The Field Group allows you to define subsections in a tab. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. • WindowType: The Window Type indicates the type of window being defined (Maintain. 1. comment or help about the use of this item. copy the entity and select User! • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

16/461 Figure 1: Window. Tab and Field .

• AD Color ID: Color for backgrounds or indicators • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. it is the top entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. comment or help about the use of this item. 17/461 . • IsInfoTab: The Accounting Tab checkbox indicates if this window contains accounting information. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • TabLevel: Hierarchical level of the tab. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.2 AD Tab The Tab Tab defines each Tab within a Window. • IsSingleRow: The Single Row Layout checkbox indicates if the default display type for this window is a single row as opposed to multi row. • AD Window ID: The Window field identifies a unique Window in the system. etc. • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. Each Tab contains a discrete selection of fields. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Tab ID: The Tab indicates a tab that displays within a window. Level 1 entries are dependent on level 0. If the level is 0. 1. • Help: The Help field contains a hint.

• OrderByClause: The ORDER BY Clause indicates the SQL ORDER BY clause to use for record selection • CommitWarning: Warning or information displayed when committing the record Not implemented yet • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. It should be fully qualified (i.otherwise it is determined that the Order Column has a value of one or greater 18/461 . Fully qualified means tablename. It may not be updated. If defined. The WHERE clause is added to the query. • AD ColumnSortOrder ID: Integer Column of the table determining the order (display. if a column is active in the ordering . the Order By replaces the default Order By clause. tablename.columnname. sort. . • AD Image ID: Defines a system image • ImportFields: Create Fields from Table Columns.• IsTranslationTab: The Translation Tab checkbox indicate if a tab contains translation information.. it decides.e. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. this process will create the fields that don’t exists in the tab but which exist in the correspondent table. • AD ColumnSortYesNo ID: If a Included Column is defined.columnname). • WhereClause: The Where Clause indicates the SQL WHERE clause to use for record selection.). • AD Column ID: Link to the database column of the table • HasTree: The Has Tree checkbox indicates if this window displays a tree metaphor. • IsReadOnly: The Read Only indicates that this field may only be Read.

• EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. The image can be a gif.3 AD Image This table stores images that can be used in different places. For customizations. 19/461 . Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. when selecting the payment method. jpeg or png. but retrieved at runtime. • FilterClause: Filter clause • EditReference: The form referenced in the edition command 1. you need to select the corresponding tab. You cannot share data between Clients. • ImageURL: URL of image. • AD Image ID: Defines a system image • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. For example.• IsSortTab: The Tab determines the Order. 1. you can force that all payments are done in cash. • BinaryData: The Binary field stores binary data. If displayed in single row record. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. the included tab is displayed as multi-row table. The image is not stored in the database. copy the entity and select User! • Included Tab ID: You can include a Tab in a Tab. name the auxiliar inout and define a validation code. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.4 AD AuxiliarInput To configure an auxiliar input. An image can be stored as an URL or as binary data.

Quantities) • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 1. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 1. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.5 AD FieldGroup A field group is defined as a fields agrupation inside a tab. Amounts. 20/461 . • AD FieldGroup ID: The Field Group indicates the logical group that this field belongs to (History. • AD Tab ID: The Tab indicates a tab that displays within a window.• Ad Auxiliarinput Id: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Changes made to the Field Tab become visible after restart due to caching • AD Field ID: The Field identifies a field on a database table. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.6 AD Field The Field table defines the Fields displayed within a tab. • Code: The Validation Code is the code that will be executed to determine the rule. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.

Quantities) • IsDisplayed: If the field is displayed. if it is actually displayed • DisplayLogic: • DisplayLength: Display length is the size that will be appear for the field. • IsCentrallyMaintained: The Centrally Maintained checkbox indicates if the Name. • AD Column ID: Link to the database column of the table • AD FieldGroup ID: The Field Group indicates the logical group that this field belongs to (History. It may not be updated. • IsReadOnly: The Read Only indicates that this field may only be Read.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • SortNo: The Record Sort No indicates the ascending sort sequence of the records • IsSameLine: The Same Line checkbox indicates that the field will display on the same line as the previous field. • AD Tab ID: The Tab indicates a tab that displays within a window. it can be different that the actual size of the column (note that if it is bigger than the column the data will be truncated to the column size). Description and Help maintained in ’System Element’ table or ’Window’ table. Amounts. the field Display Logic will determine at runtime. • IsHeading: The Heading Only checkbox indicates if just the label will display on the screen 21/461 . • Help: The Help field contains a hint. comment or help about the use of this item.

Not implemented yet • IsEncrypted: Display encryption .all characters are displayed as ’*’. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. For customizations. 22/461 . copy the entity and select User! • ShowInRelation: When this field is set as ’Y’ the field will be shown in the relation view (as well as in the edition view).e. Data storage encryption (i. you will not be able to report the data via report tools) is set in the Column definition.• IsFieldOnly: The Field Only checkbox indicates that the column will display without a label. otherwise it only will be displayed in the edition view. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary.

A view is always treated as read only in the system. • IsView: This is a view rather than a table. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. comment or help about the use of this item. copy the entity and select User! • AD Window ID: The Window field identifies a unique Window in the system. The System Element is the Central Repository for Field Names Descriptions and Help/Comments. 23/461 . Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten.2 Table and column and attachments The Table and Column defines all tables with their columns. • TableName: The DB Table Name indicates the name of the table in database. For customizations. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The File is used to store attributes of an attachment. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. • AccessLevel: Indicates the access level required for this record or process.1 AD Table In Table table are stored all the tables used in the application. 2. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. The Validation Rules defines all dynamic rules used when entering and maintaining columns and fields. This data should be the same as the defined physically in the DB.

24/461 Figure 2: Table and column and attachments .

2 AD Column Defines the columns of a table The Used in Column Tab defines the table and column this element resides in. • ImportTable: Import Table Columns from Database. Not implemented yet • IsDeleteable: The Records Deleteable checkbox indicates if a record can be deleted from the database. These rules define how an entry is determined to valid or invalid. • LoadSeq: Sequence of the table • IsSecurityEnabled: The Security Enabled checkbox indicates that user access to the data in this table can be restricted using Roles. • IsChangeLog: If selected.• AD Val Rule ID: The Validation Rule indicates a unique validation rule. • AD Column ID: Link to the database column of the table 25/461 . ¡BR¿Reference means that the data in this system is read only -¿ ¡BR¿Local means that the data in this system is not replicated to other systems . you can only deselect the Active flag • IsHighVolume: The High Volume Checkbox indicates if a search screen will display as opposed to a pick list for selecting records from this table. If records cannot be deleted. this process will create in the application dictionary those columns defined in the table (in DB) but non-existing in the column table (of the application dictionary). a log of all changes is maintained.¡BR¿Merge means that the d • PO Window ID: Window for Purchase Order (AP) Zooms • IsDefaultAcct: Is default account Not implemented yet • SQL Record Identifier: SQL Record Identifier 2. Not implemented yet • ReplicationType: The Type of data Replication determines the directon of the data replication.

Login e. • AD Val Rule ID: The Validation Rule indicates a unique validation rule.C Calendar ID .Window values (all Picks. comment or help about the use of this item. • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. It must be specified if the data type is Table or List. #AD Org ID. the first not null value becomes the default value of the column. CheckBoxes. a) Literals:. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. #Date. You cannot share data between Clients.g.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.in format @Variable@ . DateFormat . • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.g. There can be 26/461 .. #AD Client ID . copy the entity and select User! • ColumnName: The Column Name indicates the name of a column on a table as defined in the database.g. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD Reference ID: The Reference indicates the type of reference field • AD Reference Value ID: The Reference Value indicates where the reference values are stored. The SQL statement can contain variables. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary.Accounting Schema: e. • Version: The Version indicates the version of this table definition. RadioButtons. • DefaultValue: The defaults are evaluated in the order of definition. These rules define how an entry is determined to valid or invalid. The values are separated by comma or semicolon..Global defaults: e. C AcctSchema ID. ’Text’ or 123 b) Variables . and DateDoc/DateAcct) c) SQL code with the tag: @SQL=SELECT something AS DefaultValue FROM . • FieldLength: The Length indicates the length of a column as defined in the database. For customizations.

Parent.no other value other than the SQL statement. • IsParent: The Parent checkbox indicates if this column is a link to the parent table.all characters are displayed as ’*’. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. • VFormat: Value Format is the format the value will be displayed with. Client as well as Buttons. if no user preference is defined. you will not be able to report the data via report tools) is set in the Column definition. • IsKey: The key column must also be display sequence 0 in the field definition and may be hidden. the column is listed in the first find window tab and in the selection part of the window 27/461 . • IsEncrypted: Display encryption . • IsUpdateable: The Updateable checkbox indicates if a field can be updated by the user. • ReadOnlyLogic: Logic to determine if field is read only (applies only when field is read-write) • IsIdentifier: The Identifier checkbox indicates that this column is part of the identifier or key for this table. • IsMandatory: The Mandatory checkbox indicates if the field is required for a record to be save to the database. Not implemented yet • ValueMin: The Minimum Value indicates the lowest allowable value for a field. Default definitions are ignored for record columns as Key. • ValueMax: The Maximum Value indicates the highest allowable value for a field • IsSelectionColumn: If selected. The default is only evaluated.e. Data storage encryption (i.

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. callouts are Java classes that are executed when the content of a filed is modified. • AD Callout ID: The callout that will be fired when the content of a is modified. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD Callout ID: The callout that will be fired when the content of a is modified.3 AD Callout This table defines the callouts. You cannot share data between Clients. • IsSessionAttr: Checking this field the data for this column will be stored as session attribute so its content will be accessible from other tab. descriptions and terminology for a database column. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. the database column definition is updated based on your entries in the Column definition of the Application Dictionary. • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. 28/461 . • IsSyncDatabase: When selected. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• AD Element ID: The System Element allows for the central maintenance of help. 2. • IsSecondaryKey: Is secondary key • IsDesencryptable: When Is Desencryptable field is ’Y’ the content of this column will be saved in a desencryptable way.

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Java Script or Java Language. • AD Val Rule ID: The Validation Rule indicates a unique validation rule. These rules define how an entry is determined to valid or invalid. • ColumnName: The Column Name indicates the name of a column on a table as defined in the database. copy the entity and select User! 2. • Type: The Type indicates the type of validation that will occur. descriptions and terminology for a database column.2. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. • Code: The Validation Code is the code that will be executed to determine the rule. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. For customizations. This can be SQL. 29/461 . • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary.5 AD Element The Element Tab defines each system level element. You cannot share data between Clients. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.4 AD Val Rule The Validation Rules Tab defines all dynamic rules used when entering and maintaining columns and fields. • AD Element ID: The System Element allows for the central maintenance of help.

The max length is 2000 characters. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. comment or help about the use of this item. pdf. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • C Datatype ID: Defines what kind of file is (txt. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. You cannot share data between Clients.). Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • PO Name: Name on PO Screens • PO PrintName: Print name on PO Screens/Reports • PO Description: Description in PO Screens • PO Help: Help for PO Screens 2.• EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. For customizations. • C File ID: Attached file • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • PrintName: The Label to be printed indicates the name that will be printed on a document or correspondence. 30/461 .. copy the entity and select User! • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.6 C File In this table are stored the files (using the name field) attached to different windows. xls..

2. • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD Datatype ID: Type of file • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records • Text: The Text field stores the user entered information. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients. 31/461 .7 AD DataType Data type table contains the different types of files that can be attached to the records of the application. • Format: Format is the description of the data type for the attachable files. • AD Record ID: Record contains the key of the record the file is attached to. This key may belong to any table that’s why this column is generic and not specific for any table.

3 Reference The Reference defines each field type and its parameters. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten.1 AD Reference The Reference Tab defines the references that are used to validate data • AD Reference ID: The Reference indicates the type of reference field • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Help: The Help field contains a hint.2 AD Ref List The List Validation Tab defines lists to validate data • AD Ref List ID: The Reference List field indicates a list of reference values from a database tables. Reference lists populate drop down list boxes in data entry screens 32/461 . • ValidationType: The Validation Type indicates the validation method to use. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. For customizations. copy the entity and select User! 3. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • VFormat: Value Format is the format the value will be displayed with. comment or help about the use of this item. table or data type validation. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 3. Not implemented yet • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. These include list.

33/461 Figure 3: Reference .

You cannot share data between Clients. For customizations.g. the system automatically creates a numeric number. C Order). • AD Key: The Key Column indicates that this the unique identifier of a record on this table. • AD Reference ID: The Reference indicates the type of reference field • ValidFrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range • ValidTo: The Valid To date indicates the last day of a date range • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. copy the entity and select User! 3. 34/461 . • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. You cannot share data between Clients.3 AD Ref Table The Table Validation Tab defines tables to validate data • AD Reference ID: The Reference indicates the type of reference field • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. If you leave the search key empty. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.

4 AD Ref Search • AD Ref Search ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • WhereClause: The Where Clause indicates the SQL WHERE clause to use for record selection.• AD Display: The Display Column indicates the column that will display. copy the entity and select User! 3. For customizations. • IsValueDisplayed: The Display Value checkbox indicates if the value column will display with the display column.5 AD Ref Search Column • AD Ref Search Column ID: 35/461 . The WHERE clause is added to the query. • OrderByClause: The ORDER BY Clause indicates the SQL ORDER BY clause to use for record selection • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. • AD Column ID: Link to the database column of the table 3. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Reference ID: The Reference indicates the type of reference field • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. Fully qualified means tablename.columnname. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten.

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Ref Search ID: • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Columnname: The Column Name indicates the name of a column on a table as defined in the database. • Columntype: • Column Suffix: 36/461 . You cannot share data between Clients.

1 AD Menu The Menu Tab defines the tree structured menu which will be used for the selected Organization. It may not be updated. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Action: The Action field indicates the Action to be performed for this element. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 37/461 . Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. • IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node.4 Menu The Menu defines the Menu which will display. The menu items that each user will see depends upon the security defined. Menus are used to control the display of those screens a user has access to. 4. • AD Task ID: The Task field identifies a Operation System Task in the system. You cannot share data between Clients. • IsReadOnly: The Read Only indicates that this field may only be Read. • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. • AD Window ID: The Window field identifies a unique Window in the system. • AD Workflow ID: The Workflow field identifies a unique Workflow in the system. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Menu ID: The Menu identifies a unique Menu. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.

38/461 Figure 4: Menu .

• AD Workbench ID: Collection of windows. • AD Form ID: The Special Form field identifies a unique Special Form in the system. 39/461 . For customizations. reports • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten.• AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. copy the entity and select User! • Url: The URL defines an online address for this Business Partner.

• Help: The Help field contains a hint. the system automatically creates a numeric number. If you leave the search key empty. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. The Report & Process is used to define the parameters and access rules for every Report and Process within the system. For customizations. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. copy the entity and select User! • IsUserStartable: The User can start Process checkbox indicates that this process can be initiated by the user (as opposed to system initiated) Not implemented yet 40/461 . comment or help about the use of this item. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients.5 Process. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. Form and Task The Forms defines any window which is not automatically generated. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.1 AD Process The Report and Process Tab defines each report and process run in the system. • AccessLevel: Indicates the access level required for this record or process.g. C Order). The Tasks defines the different tasks used in workflows and the access level for those tasks. 5.

Form and Task .41/461 Figure 5: Process.

• IsReport: The Report checkbox indicates that this record is a report as opposed to a process • IsDirectPrint: The Direct Print checkbox indicates that this report will print without a print dialog box being displayed. 42/461 . • AD Process Para ID: Process Parameter identifies the parameters of a process or report. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.• ProcedureName: The Procedure indicates the name of the database procedure called by this report or process. You cannot share data between Clients. • Statistic Count: Internal statistics. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • IsBackground: The background process run with the application in a planned time 5. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD ReportView ID: The Report View indicates the view used to generate this report.2 AD Process Para The Report Parameter table defines any parameters required to execute a report or process. • AD PrintFormat ID: The print format determines how data is rendered for print. • Statistic Seconds: Internal statistics how many seconds have been used the process while it was being executed. • Classname: The Classname identifies the Java classname used by this report or process. this field counts how many times the process has been executed.

• AD Val Rule ID: The Validation Rule indicates a unique validation rule. • ColumnName: The Column Name indicates the name of a column on a table as defined in the database. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • AD Reference ID: The Reference indicates the type of reference field • AD Reference Value ID: The Reference Value indicates where the reference values are stored.g..g..Login e. if no user 43/461 . The default is only evaluated. ’Text’ or 123 b) Variables . • FieldLength: The Length indicates the length of a column as defined in the database. These rules define how an entry is determined to valid or invalid.in format @Variable@ .• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.Global defaults: e. The SQL statement can contain variables. the first not null value becomes the default value of the column.Window values (all Picks. #AD Client ID . • Help: The Help field contains a hint.g. • IsCentrallyMaintained: The Centrally Maintained checkbox indicates if the Name. RadioButtons. • IsMandatory: The Mandatory checkbox indicates if the field is required for a record to be save to the database. There can be no other value other than the SQL statement. and DateDoc/DateAcct) c) SQL code with the tag: @SQL=SELECT something AS DefaultValue FROM .Accounting Schema: e. #AD Org ID. a) Literals:. • DefaultValue: The defaults are evaluated in the order of definition. • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. CheckBoxes. • IsRange: The Range checkbox indicates that this parameter is a range of values. #Date. C AcctSchema ID. The values are separated by comma or semicolon. It must be specified if the data type is Table or List.C Calendar ID . comment or help about the use of this item. Description and Help maintained in ’System Element’ table or ’Window’ table. DateFormat .

• VFormat: Value Format is the format the value will be displayed with. The default is only evaluated. #AD Org ID. For System Admin use only. Default definitions are ignored for record columns as Key. #Date. • AD Form ID: The Special Form field identifies a unique Special Form in the system. Client as well as Buttons. Parent. descriptions and terminology for a database column. Default definitions are ignored for record columns as Key. C AcctSchema ID.g.g. #AD Client ID .3 AD Form The Forms Tab defines any window which is not automatically generated. CheckBoxes. • DefaultValue2: The defaults are evaluated in the order of definition. 44/461 . ’Text’ or 123 b) Variables . RadioButtons. copy the entity and select User! 5. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten.C Calendar ID .preference is defined. Client as well as Buttons. the first not null value becomes the default value of the column. and DateDoc/DateAcct) c) SQL code with the tag: @SQL=SELECT something AS DefaultValue FROM . • ValueMax: The Maximum Value indicates the highest allowable value for a field • AD Element ID: The System Element allows for the central maintenance of help.g. For customizations. a) Literals:. The values are separated by comma or semicolon. Not implemented yet • ValueMin: The Minimum Value indicates the lowest allowable value for a field.Global defaults: e. The SQL statement can contain variables. if no user preference is defined. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary.in format @Variable@ . You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.Login e.Window values (all Picks... There can be no other value other than the SQL statement.Accounting Schema: e. DateFormat . Parent.

The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD Task ID: The Task field identifies a Operation System Task in the system. • AccessLevel: Indicates the access level required for this record or process. • AccessLevel: Indicates the access level required for this record or process.4 AD Task The Task Tab defines the unique tasks that will be used. comment or help about the use of this item. You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. 45/461 . • OS Command: The OS Command is for optionally defining a command to that will be part of this task. comment or help about the use of this item. • Classname: The Classname identifies the Java classname used by this report or process. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. copy the entity and select User! 5. For example it can be used to starting a back up process or performing a file transfer. For customizations.

copy the entity and select User! • ClassName: The Classname identifies the Java classname used by this report or process. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten.• EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. For customizations. 46/461 .

copy the entity and select User! 6. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. You cannot share data between Clients. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. For customizations. 47/461 . • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. the access level for the Workflow and the Nodes or Steps within the Workflow. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • AccessLevel: Indicates the access level required for this record or process.2 AD WF Node The Node Tab defines each Node or step in this Workflow. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.6 Workflow The Workflow defines Workflows in the system. • AD WF Node ID: The Workflow Node indicates a unique step or process in a Workflow. 6. • AD Workflow ID: The Workflow field identifies a unique Workflow in the system. • AD WF Node ID: The Workflow Node indicates a unique step or process in a Workflow.1 AD Workflow The Workflow Tab defines Workflows in the system. comment or help about the use of this item.

48/461 Figure 6: Workflow .

• Help: The Help field contains a hint. comment or help about the use of this item. • AD Window ID: The Window field identifies a unique Window in the system. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. in a specified sequence and optionally including approvals • AD Task ID: The Task field identifies a Operation System Task in the system. • IsCentrallyMaintained: The Centrally Maintained checkbox indicates if the Name. • AD Form ID: The Special Form field identifies a unique Special Form in the system. • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. • Action: The Action field indicates the Action to be performed for this element. For customizations. • Workflow ID: The Workflow field identifies a unique workflow. You cannot share data between Clients. Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. Description and Help maintained in ’System Element’ table or ’Window’ table.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. A workflow is a grouping of related tasks. copy the entity and select User! • Xposition: Absolute X (horizontal) position in 1/72 of an inch Not implemented yet • Yposition: Absolute Y (vertical) position in 1/72 of an inch Not implemented yet 49/461 . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD Workflow ID: The Workflow field identifies a unique Workflow in the system.

• IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. 6. • AD WF Next ID: The Next Node indicates the next step or task in this Workflow. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD WF Node ID: The Workflow Node indicates a unique step or process in a Workflow. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. You cannot share data between Clients. Not implemented yet 50/461 . the window must be regenerated. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.6. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.4 AD WF NodeNext The Next Nodes Tab defines the order or Nodes or Steps in a Workflow. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD WF Node ID: The Workflow Node indicates a unique step or process in a Workflow.3 AD WF Node Trl Allows the translation of any workflow node of the application. comment or help about the use of this item. You cannot share data between Clients. After the edition. • Condition: The Condition field identifies the condition that must be met before the Workflow can proceed to the next task.

They are used in reports for defining report points and summarization levels.2 AD TreeNodeBP This table defines relations of nodes for trees of Business Partners. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.7 Tree The Tree and Node Image defines the descriptors and images that will be used when a Tree is displayed. • AD Tree ID: The Tree field identifies a unique Tree in the system. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Tree ID: The Tree field identifies a unique Tree in the system. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Parent ID: The Parent indicates the value used to represent a summary level or report to level for a record 51/461 .1 AD TreeNodePR This table defines the relations of nodes for trees of products. • Node ID: Identifies a tree node. 7. Trees define roll ups or summary levels of information. Trees define roll ups or summary levels of information. • Parent ID: The Parent indicates the value used to represent a summary level or report to level for a record • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records 7. They are used in reports for defining report points and summarization levels. • Node ID: Identifies a tree node.

52/461 Figure 7: Tree .

• SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records 7. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. They are used in reports for defining report points and summarization levels. You cannot share data between Clients. Trees define roll ups or summary levels of information. • AD Tree ID: The Tree field identifies a unique Tree in the system. You cannot share data between Clients. • Node ID: Identifies a tree node. • Parent ID: The Parent indicates the value used to represent a summary level or report to level for a record • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records 7.4 AD TreeBar This table defines the relations between nodes for bookmarks trees. They are used in reports for defining report points and summarization levels. Trees define roll ups or summary levels of information. • AD Tree ID: The Tree field identifies a unique Tree in the system.3 AD TreeNode This table defines the relations of nodes for generic trees. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • Node ID: Identifies a tree node. 53/461 . • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system.

6 AD TreeNodeMM This table defines the relations of nodes for menu tree. • AD Tree ID: The Tree field identifies a unique Tree in the system. • Parent ID: The Parent indicates the value used to represent a summary level or report to level for a record • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records 54/461 .5 AD Tree The Tree table defines all the trees that will be used in the application. You cannot share data between Clients. Trees define roll ups or summary levels of information. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Trees define roll ups or summary levels of information. They are used in reports for defining report points and summarization levels. • Node ID: Identifies a tree node. • AD Tree ID: The Tree field identifies a unique Tree in the system. you may define one tree for your Products and another tree for your Business Partners.7. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. You cannot share data between Clients. They are used in reports for defining report points and summarization levels. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • IsAllNodes: If this field is checked all nodes are included 7. For example. • TreeType: The Tree Type / Area field determines the type of tree this is. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

messages. You cannot share data between Clients. • ErrorMsg: In this filed is stored the error message in case the process fails. You may add a prefix or a suffix or change the current number. The system creates messages while performing processes. • AD PInstance ID: Process Instance identifies the instance of a process. 55/461 . • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. The Sequence defines how document numbers will be sequenced. sequences. otherwise it has ’N’.1 AD PInstance This table is used internally by the application. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • Result: The Result indicates the result of any action taken on this request. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. log The Message defines the Message Text and Message Tips for each system generated message. • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. 8.8 Internals: process execution.Change the way document numbers are generated. Whenever a process is called a new line is added to this table including the process identifier and the record that called the process. • Record ID: The Record ID is the internal unique identifier of a record • IsProcessing: When the process is being accomplished this record has ’Y’ value. Every time a process is executed a new instance of it is created.

messages. sequences.56/461 Figure 8: Internals: process execution. log .

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • P Number To: Number passed as maximun range as parameter to a process instance. 8. • P Date To: Date passed as maximun date as parameter to a process instance. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • ParameterName: Name describing the parameter. • AD PInstance ID: Process Instance identifies the instance of a process. • P Date: Date passed as parameter to a process instance. Every time a process is executed a new instance of it is created. • P String To: String passed as maximun string range to a process instance. Every time a process is executed a new instance of it is created.8. • AD PInstance ID: Process Instance identifies the instance of a process. • P Number: Number passed as parameter to a process instance. • Info: The Information displays data from the source document line. • P String: String passed as parameter to a process instance. 57/461 .3 AD PInstance Log Maintains a log of process instances. • Info To: The Information displays data from the source document line. You cannot share data between Clients.2 AD PInstance Para Process Instance Parameter contains the values of the parameters that are passed to a process instance.

• AD Note ID: Identifies a System Notice • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Record ID: The Record ID is the internal unique identifier of a record • Text: The Text field stores the user entered information. • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. 58/461 .4 AD Note The Notice Tab provides a method of viewing messages that are generated by this system when performing processes. You cannot share data between Clients. • P Msg: Process Message 8. • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. • P ID: Process ID • P Number: Number passed as parameter to a process instance. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • AD Message ID: Information and Error messages • Reference: The Reference displays the source document number.• Log ID: Log identifier • P Date: Date passed as parameter to a process instance. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed.

These can also include a alpha suffix and / or prefix. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • IncrementNo: The Increment indicates the number to increment the last document number by to arrive at the next sequence number • StartNo: The Start Number indicates the starting position in the line or field number in the line • CurrentNext: The Current Next indicates the next number to use for this document • CurrentNextSys: This field is for system use only and should not be modified. • IsAudited: The Activate Audit checkbox indicates if an audit trail of numbers generated will be kept.5 AD Sequence The Sequence Tab defines the numeric sequencing to use for documents. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. You cannot share data between Clients. 59/461 . Not implemented yet • IsAutoSequence: The Auto Numbering checkbox indicates if the system will assign the next number automatically. • VFormat: Value Format is the format the value will be displayed with. • AD Sequence ID: The Sequence defines the numbering sequence to be used for documents. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.8. • IsTableID: The Used for Record ID checkbox indicates if the document id will be used as the key to the record • Prefix: The Prefix indicates the characters to print in front of the document number. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

Core and Application might be automatically synchronized and customizations deleted or overwritten. this texts are stored in order to be used during the translation process. • MsgType: The Message Type indicates the type of message being defined. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • AD Textinterfaces ID: Identifies a text in a manually created window. If you leave the search key empty.• Suffix: The Suffix indicates the characters to append to the document number. • EntityType: The Entity Types Dictionary. the system automatically creates a numeric number.6 AD Message The Message Tab displays error message text and menu messages • AD Message ID: Information and Error messages • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. For customizations. • MsgText: The Message Text indicates the message that will display • MsgTip: The Message Tip defines additional help or information about this message.7 AD TextInterfaces Texts for manual interfaces. You cannot share data between Clients. copy the entity and select User! 8. 8. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. Valid message types are Informational. • StartNewYear: The Restart Sequence Every Year checkbox indicates that the documents sequencing should return to the starting number on the first day of the year. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. Menu and Error. 60/461 . C Order).g.

• Filename: 8. • Columnname: The Column Name indicates the name of a column on a table as defined in the database. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. You cannot share data between Clients. 61/461 . • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • Join Group1: • Tablename: The DB Table Name indicates the name of the table in database. You cannot share data between Clients.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Join Group2: • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.8 AD Dimension The dimensions are needed for the multidimensional analisys reports • AD Dimension ID: Identifies a dimension for multidemensional analisys reports • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Text: The Text field stores the user entered information.

9 AD Month It is necessary to configurate the months of the year to the terms of the year. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.g. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record.8. C Order). the system automatically creates a numeric number. • AD Month ID: A month of the year. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. If you leave the search key empty. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. You cannot share data between Clients. • Quarter: Defines in which quarter of the year is placed the month 62/461 .

• ClassName: The Classname identifies the Java classname used by this report or process. 63/461 . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. forms.9 Model objects mapping The Model Objects Mapping defines all the mappings for each of the application elements (tabs. • AD Workbench ID: Collection of windows.) 9. You cannot share data between Clients.. • AD Reference ID: The Reference indicates the type of reference field • AD Callout ID: The callout that will be fired when the content of a is modified. processes.. • AD Workflow ID: The Workflow field identifies a unique Workflow in the system. reports • AD Form ID: The Special Form field identifies a unique Special Form in the system. • Action: The Action field indicates the Action to be performed for this element. • AD Tab ID: The Tab indicates a tab that displays within a window.1 AD Model Object • AD Model Object ID: Identifies an object of the dictionary. • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. • AD Task ID: The Task field identifies a Operation System Task in the system.

64/461 Figure 9: Model objects mapping .

65/461 .2 AD Model Object Mapping This table contains the mappings (how the classes are accessed) for the objects of the dictionary. • AD Model Object Mapping ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Model Object ID: Identifies an object of the dictionary. • MappingName: • Isdefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value.9. You cannot share data between Clients.

If a language is a System Language. If the language is not supplied.uci. if you want to have translated screens available in this language.ics. You cannot share data between Clients. the system allows you to just translate elements for printing documents.1 AD Language If you want to add an additional User Interface language. 66/461 . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. fr CN . you can change the User Interface to this language (after translation). Otherwise.din.txt • CountryCode: For details .de/gremien/nas/nabd/iso3166ma/codlstp1.html or . 10.htm • IsBaseLanguage: • IsSystemLanguage: Select. select System Language. Otherwise the language is only used for printing documents. you can translate the terms yourself.10 Translations The Translations allows you to define multiple parallel language for users. • LanguageISO: The ISO Language Code indicates the standard ISO code for a language in lower case.http://www.org/trade/rec/rec03en.Canadian French). Information can be found at http://www.edu/pub/ietf/http/related/iso639. The Language needs to be a (verified) System Language • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. we suggest using the Java convention of country and language (e.http://www.unece.g. For the language code. Please notify your system administrator to run the language maintenance scripts to enable the use of this language. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. This allows users to access the same data but have the application elements appear in different languages. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.

67/461 Figure 10: Translations .

It is important to check the translated option. 10.3 AD Process Trl Shows report tab translation for several languages This tab contains the process translation to different languages.2 AD Window Trl This tab contains the windows translation to different languages.• AD Language ID: 10. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. 68/461 . comment or help about the use of this item. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. You cannot share data between Clients. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. It is important to check the translated option. • AD Window ID: The Window field identifies a unique Window in the system.

69/461 . • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • CommitWarning: Warning or information displayed when committing the record • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. 10. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. the window must be regenerated. comment or help about the use of this item. comment or help about the use of this item. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.After the edition. • AD Tab ID: The Tab indicates a tab that displays within a window.4 AD Tab Trl Allows the translation of any tab of the application. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. You cannot share data between Clients. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.

10. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Element ID: The System Element allows for the central maintenance of help. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. descriptions and terminology for a database column. It is important to check the translated option. • PrintName: The Label to be printed indicates the name that will be printed on a document or correspondence. comment or help about the use of this item.5 AD Element Trl This tab contains the elements translation to different languages. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. The max length is 2000 characters. • PO Name: Name on PO Screens • PO PrintName: Print name on PO Screens/Reports • PO Description: Description in PO Screens • PO Help: Help for PO Screens • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. 70/461 .

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Amounts. comment or help about the use of this item. • AD FieldGroup ID: The Field Group indicates the logical group that this field belongs to (History. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. the window must be regenerated. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. After the edition. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 10. which are not centrally maintained. You cannot share data between Clients. 71/461 . • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated.6 AD FieldGroup Trl This tab contains field group translations to different languages Run Synchronize Terminology to update menu translation.10. Quantities) • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.7 AD Reference Trl • AD Reference ID: The Reference indicates the type of reference field • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You need only to translate Fields. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You cannot share data between Clients. • Help: The Help field contains a hint.

You cannot share data between Clients. You cannot share data between Clients. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. • AD Menu ID: The Menu identifies a unique Menu. comment or help about the use of this item. Menus are used to control the display of those screens a user has access to.10. 10.9 AD Menu Trl Menu translations are derived from Window.8 AD Process Para Trl Shows parameter tab translation for several languages • AD Process Para ID: Process Parameter identifies the parameters of a process or report. You only need to translate Summary level items. Run Synchronize Terminology to update menu translation. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Process. 72/461 . • Help: The Help field contains a hint. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. etc. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.

10 AD Message Trl This tab contains the messages translation to different languages. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. After the edition. Allows the translation of any field of the application. if centrally maintained. 73/461 . the window must be regenerated. • MsgText: The Message Text indicates the message that will display • MsgTip: The Message Tip defines additional help or information about this message. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. You only need to translate not centrally maintained Fields. 10. 10. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Message ID: Information and Error messages • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. It is important to check the translated option. You cannot share data between Clients.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Field ID: The Field identifies a field on a database table.11 AD Field Trl Fields are automatically translated.

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Text: The Text field stores the user entered information.12 AD TextInterfaces Trl • AD Textinterfaces ID: Identifies a text in a manually created window. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. comment or help about the use of this item. After the edition. You cannot share data between Clients. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. 10. • Istranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. You cannot share data between Clients. the window must be regenerated. 74/461 . • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.13 AD Task Trl Allows the translation of any task of the application. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 10. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. • AD Task ID: The Task field identifies a Operation System Task in the system. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

10. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.15 AD Form Trl This tab contains form tab data translation to different languages Allows the translation of any form of the application. comment or help about the use of this item. comment or help about the use of this item. • Help: The Help field contains a hint.After the edition. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD Form ID: The Special Form field identifies a unique Special Form in the system. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. You cannot share data between Clients. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. the window must be regenerated. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. After the edition. 10. 75/461 . • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. • AD Workflow ID: The Workflow field identifies a unique Workflow in the system. the window must be regenerated.14 AD Workflow Trl Allows the translation of any workflow of the application.

The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Reference lists populate drop down list boxes in data entry screens • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 10. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. comment or help about the use of this item. • AD Ref List ID: The Reference List field indicates a list of reference values from a database tables. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. After the edition. You cannot share data between Clients. the window must be regenerated. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated.• AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 76/461 . • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.16 AD Ref List Trl Allows the translation of any reference list of the application. • Help: The Help field contains a hint.

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. comment or help about the use of this item. the window must be regenerated. 77/461 .10. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD WF Node ID: The Workflow Node indicates a unique step or process in a Workflow. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated.17 AD WF Node Trl Allows the translation of any workflow node of the application. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. After the edition. You cannot share data between Clients.

• Password: The Password indicates the Password for this User Id. Users can log into the system and have access to functionality via one or more roles. vendors and employees. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. You cannot share data between Clients. The Table and Column defines all tables with their columns The User allows you to define each User of the system. tasks.11 Access Maintain Data Access Roles of Roles/Responsibilties The Business Partner allows you do define any party with whom you transact. Prior to generating Orders you must define your customers. 11. For a client an Administrator and User role are predefined. he Forms Window defines any window which is not automatically generated. the access level for the Workflow and the Nodes or Steps within the Workflow. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Prior to entering or importing products. etc. The Window. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. This includes customers. You may add additional roles to control access for specific functionality or data. Tab & Field defines the presentation of tables and columns within each window. Roles control access to windows. For System Admin use only.1 AD User The User Tab defines the log in for Users who have access to the system. reports. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. The Maintain Tasks defines the different tasks used in workflows and the access level for those tasks. you must define your vendors. The Report & Process is used to define the parameters and access rules for every Report and Process within the system. The Role allows you to define the different roles that users of this system will have. 78/461 .You can add users to the role. The User identifies a unique user in the system. The Workflow defines Workflows in the system. Passwords are required to identify authorized users.

79/461 Figure 11: Access .

• C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • C Greeting ID: The Greeting identifies the greeting to print on correspondence. • Comments: The Comments field allows for free form entry of additional information. Employee or Salesperson • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • Supervisor ID: The Supervisor indicates who will be used for forwarding and escalating issues for this user.g. Required if the mail server requires authentification to send emails. This can include Vendor. • EmailUserPW: Required if the mail server requires authentification to send emails. • Title: The Title indicates the name that an entity is referred to as. • PA GoalPrivate ID: The Personal Goals displays goals that a user will set for themselves. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • Phone: The Phone field identifies a telephone number • Phone2: The 2nd Phone field identifies an alternate telephone number. • EmailUser: The user name in the mail system is usually the string before the @ of your email address. Customer.com). joe. • PA Goal ID: The Performance Goal indicates what this users performance will be measured against.smith@company.• Email: The Email Address is the Electronic Mail ID for this User and should be fully qualified (e. • Fax: The Fax identifies a facsimile number for this Business Partner or Location 80/461 .

2 AD User Roles The User Roles Tab define the Roles each user may have. tasks. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. and inter-organization transactions. 81/461 . • Birthday: Birthday or Anniversary day • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). The Roles will determine what windows.• LastContact: The Last Contact indicates the date that this Business Partner Contact was last contacted. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. You cannot share data between Clients. The User Assignment Tab displays Users who have been defined for this Role. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System. • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. with centralized services. processes and workflows that a User has access to. • LastResult: The Last Result identifies the result of the last contact made. Not implemented yet • Firstname: First Name of the contact • Lastname: Last name of the contact • UserName: Name that identifies the user in the System 11.

You can give users access to this role and modify the access of this role to windows. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Client level data or Client and Organization level data.3 AD Role Define the role and add the client and organizations the role has access to. You cannot share data between Clients. ¡BR¿If the Role User Level is Manual. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • UserLevel: The User Level field determines if users of this Role will have access to System level data. • ClientList: Indicates the Clients (by client id) that this Role can access. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Tree Menu ID: Tree Menu • IsManual: The Manual check box indicates if the process will done manually. • OrgList: The Organization List indicates the Organizations (by organization id) that this Role can access. 82/461 . Multiple Clients are delimited by a comma ’. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Organization level data. processes and reports as well as tasks. forms. Multiple Organizations are delimited by a comma ’.11.’.’. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • AmtApproval: The Approval Amount field indicates the amount limit this Role has for approval of documents. the as Select Role for with Data Access Restrictions • AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System.

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 83/461 . 11. You cannot share data between Clients.5 AD Window Access The Window Access Tab defines the Roles which have access to this Window. • AD Window ID: The Window field identifies a unique Window in the system. The Window Access Tab defines the Windows and type of access that this Role is granted. • IsReadWrite: The Read Write indicates that this field may be read and updated. 11. • AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System. • AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System. • IsReadWrite: The Read Write indicates that this field may be read and updated. The Report Access Tab determines who can access a report or process • AD Process ID: The Process field identifies a unique Process or Report in the system. • AD Task ID: The Task field identifies a Operation System Task in the system.4 AD Task Access The Task Access Tab defines the Task and type of access that this Role is granted. The Task Access Tab defines the Roles that will have access to this task and the type of access each Role is granted.6 AD Process Access The Process Access Tab defines the Processes and type of access that this Role is granted. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.11.

11. You cannot share data between Clients. 84/461 . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • IsReadWrite: The Read Write indicates that this field may be read and updated. You cannot share data between Clients.• AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System. • AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System. The Workflow Access Tab defines the Roles who have access to this Workflow. The Forms Access Tab defines the access rules for this form • AD Form ID: The Special Form field identifies a unique Special Form in the system. • AD Workflow ID: The Workflow field identifies a unique Workflow in the system.8 AD Form Access The Form Access Tab defines the Forms and type of access that this Role is granted. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.7 AD Workflow Access The Workflow Access Tab defines the Workflows and type of access that this Role is granted. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 11. • AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System. You cannot share data between Clients. • IsReadWrite: The Read Write indicates that this field may be read and updated.

You cannot share data between Clients. the Role can(not) access all data of this table. • IsExclude: If selected. It may not be updated.10 AD Table Access If listed here. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. the role cannot access the data specified. • IsReadOnly: The Read Only indicates that this field may only be Read. 11. • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. If not selected. the role can ONLY access the data specified 85/461 . 11.9 AD Role OrgAccess Add the client organizations the user has access to.• IsReadWrite: The Read Write indicates that this field may be read and updated. • AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System. You cannot share data between Clients. even if the role has access to the functionality • AD Role ID: The Role determines security and access a user who has this Role will have in the System. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

htm • HasRegion: The Country has Region checkbox is selected if the Country being defined is divided into regions.html or . Region and Location The Countries. The Location defines the address data within the system. the Region Tab is accessible. 12. Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document. The following notations are used: @C@=City @P@=Postal @A@=PostalAdd @R@=Region 86/461 . • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • C Country ID: The Country defines a Country.http://www.1 C Country The Country Tab defines any country in which you do business. If this checkbox is selected. • ExpressionPhone: Phone Format • DisplaySequence: The Address Print format defines the format to be used when this address prints.de/gremien/nas/nabd/iso3166ma/codlstp1.http://www. • RegionName: The Region Name defines the name that will print when this region is used in a document. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.12 Country.unece. It defines the format of the address as well as associating Regions with Countries and Cities with Regions or Countries. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Regions and Cities defines the different entities that can be used in any address field. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.din. • CountryCode: For details .org/trade/rec/rec03en. Values entered here are referenced in location records for Business Partners.

Region and Location .87/461 Figure 12: Country.

• AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record 12.• ExpressionPostal: Postal code Format • HasPostal Add: The Additional Postal Code checkbox indicates if this address uses an additional Postal Code. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document.2 C Country Trl Translation • C Country ID: The Country defines a Country. • RegionName: The Region Name defines the name that will print when this region is used in a document. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. If it is selected an additional field displays for entry of the additional Postal Code. • ExpressionPostal Add: Additional Postal Format • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. 88/461 .

The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • C Region ID: The Region identifies a unique Region for this Country. Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document.3 C Region The Region Tab defines a Region within a Country. 12. • C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.• DisplaySequence: The Address Print format defines the format to be used when this address prints. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Country ID: The Country defines a Country.4 C Location The Location Tab defines the location of an Organization. 89/461 . The following notations are used: @C@=City @P@=Postal @A@=PostalAdd @R@=Region 12. • Address1: The Address 1 identifies the address for an entity’s location • Address2: The Address 2 provides additional address information for an entity. apartment number or similar information. This tab is enabled only if the Has Region checkbox is selected for the Country. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. It can be used for building location.

• C City ID: City in a country • RegionName: The Region Name defines the name that will print when this region is used in a document.• City: The City identifies a unique City for this Country or Region. any additional Postal Code information. • C Country ID: The Country defines a Country. • C Region ID: The Region identifies a unique Region for this Country. if appropriate. Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document. • Postal Add: The Additional ZIP or Postal Code identifies. • Postal: The Postal Code field identifies the postal code for this entity’s address. 90/461 .

You cannot share data between Clients. Client. Preferences Common System Definition . • ReleaseNo: Internal Release Number • SupportUnits: • Password: The Password indicates the Password for this User Id. Each Client defines the accounting parameters (Accounting Schema. Org and Session info.1 AD System Common System Definition. Passwords are required to identify authorized users. Not implemented yet • UserName: Name that identifies the user in the System • Info: The Information displays data from the source document line. The Organization Window allows you to define and maintain Organizational entities. History of Online or Web Sessions The Client is the highest level of an independent business entity.13 System.Please no not add additional records. Do NOT create additional records!! • AD System ID: Common System Definition • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Non Monetary UOM’s). Tree definition.Only one Record . • ReplicationType: The Type of data Replication determines the directon of the data replication. An Organization is often a legal entity or sub-unit for which documents and transactions are processed 13. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Not implemented yet • Version: The Version indicates the version of this table definition. ¡BR¿Reference means that the data in this system is read only -¿ ¡BR¿Local 91/461 . Each Client will have one or more Organizations reporting to it.

Org and Session info. Preferences .92/461 Figure 13: System. Client.

where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. If you leave the search key empty.999.000-999.999 for the Application Dictionary 900. If you create a new client here. the system automatically creates a numeric number. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 93/461 . alerts and escalation are sent from this email address as well as delivery information if the sales rep does not have an email account.¡BR¿Merge means that the d • IDRangeStart: The ID Range allows to restrict the range of the internally used IDs.means that the data in this system is not replicated to other systems . you will not be abl • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.000.Do not create a new client in this window.2 AD Client The Client Definition Tab defines a unique client. • RequestEMail: EMails for requests. and IMAP to process incoming mail.999 for Application Dictionary customizations/extensions and ¿ 1. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. The standard rages are 0-899. 13.999. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.Please note that the ID range is NOT enforced. • IDRangeEnd: The ID Range allows to restrict the range of the internally used IDs. The address must be filly qualified (e. but use Initial Client Setup (System Administrator Role) to set up the required security and access rules. joe.com) and should be a valid address.smith@company.999 but can easily be extended. • SMTPHost: The host name of the Mail Server for this client with SMTP services to send mail. Please note that the ID range is NOT enforced. The ID range is on a per table basis. You cannot share data between Clients.g. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The standard system limit is 9.g. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. C Order).000 for client data.

The access is via ctx. users are required to define their email user name and password. Required. Payment Terms. The path/directory is accessed by the application server and may not be accessible to clients. Requires IMAP services. alerts and escalation are sent from this email address as well as delivery information if the sales rep does not have an email account. passwords.webParam2 • WebParam3: The parameter could be used in the JSP page for variables like logos. • IsSmtpAuthorization: Some email servers require authentification before sending emails. URLs or entire HTML blocks. URLs or entire HTML blocks.webParam3 • WebParam4: The parameter could be used in the JSP page for variables like logos. If yes. The access is via ctx. If left empty the default mailbox (INBOX) will be used. • DocumentDir: Directory to store documents by the application server. The access is via ctx.. passwords.• RequestUser: EMail user name for requests. The access is via ctx.webParam4 94/461 .. • IsMultiLingualDocument: If selected. • RequestUserPW: Password of the user name (ID) for mail processing • RequestFolder: Email folder used to read emails to process as requests. delivery will fail. if your mail server requires authentification as well as for processing incoming mails. • WebParam1: The parameter could be used in the JSP page for variables like logos. passwords. that the base language is always English.¡BR¿Please note. . URLs or entire HTML blocks. passwords.). If authentification is required and no user name and password is required. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • WebDir: The Web Directory defines the look and feel for the Web interface. you enable multi lingual documents and need to maintain translations for entities used in documents (examples: Products. URLs or entire HTML blocks.webParam1 • WebParam2: The parameter could be used in the JSP page for variables like logos.

• IsDiscountLineAmt: If the payment discount is calculated from line amounts only. • WebParam6: The parameter could be used in the JSP page for variables like logos. passwords. The accounting rules and high level defaults are defined here. For example you may need a standard calendar that runs from Jan 1 to Dec 31 and a fiscal calendar that runs from July 1 to June 30. The access is via ctx. Multiple calendars can be used. currency and calendar. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Calendar ID: The Calendar uniquely identifies an accounting calendar.webParam5 13. a confirmation is sent to the EMail addess of the customer from the request EMail address copying this email address when entered. URLs or entire HTML blocks. 95/461 .• WebOrderEMail: When processig a web order. This is e. passwords. The Calendar is used to determine if a period is open or closed. currency and calendar.g. If not selected the total invoice amount is used to calculate the payment discount.3 AD ClientInfo The Client Info Tab defines the details for each client. business practice in the US. URLs or entire HTML blocks.webParam6 • WebParam5: The parameter could be used in the JSP page for variables like logos. • C AcctSchema2 ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. The access is via ctx. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • WebInfo: Display HTML Info in the Web Store . the tax and charge amounts are not included. • C AcctSchema1 ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used accounting such as costing method. • Acct2 Active: The Second Accounting Schema indicates an alternate set of rules to use for generating reports.by default in the header.

• Acct3 Active: The Third Accounting Schema indicates an alternate set of rules to use for generating reports. • C AcctSchema3 ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method, currency and calendar • C UOM Volume ID: The Standard UOM for Volume indicates the UOM to use for products referenced by volume in a document. • C UOM Weight ID: The Standard UOM for Weight indicates the UOM to use for products referenced by weight in a document. • C UOM Length ID: The Standard UOM for Length indicates the UOM to use for products referenced by length in a document. • C UOM Time ID: The Standard UOM for Time indicates the UOM to use for products referenced by time in a document. • AD Tree Menu ID: Tree Menu • AD Tree Org ID: Organization Tree • AD Tree BPartner ID: Business Partner Tree • AD Tree Project ID: Project Tree • AD Tree SalesRegion ID: • AD Tree Product ID: Product Tree • M ProductFreight ID: • C BPartnerCashTrx ID: When creating a new Business Partner from the Business Partner Search Field (right-click: Create), the selected business partner is used as a template, e.g. to define price list, payment terms, etc.

96/461

• PA Goal ID: The Performance Goal indicates what this users performance will be measured against. • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing, margin and cost of items purchased or sold. • AllowNegativeStock: Allow negative stock • Checkorderorg: The checkorderorg identifies the order organization and the business partner organization and makes sure both are the same. • Checkinoutorg: The Checkinoutorg identifies the shipment organization and the business partner organization and makes sure both are the same • Groupacctinvlines: Group Accounting Invoice Lines

13.4

AD Org

The Organization Tab is used to define an Organization. Each Organization has a Key and Name and optionally a Description. When adding a new organization, you must re-login to be able to access the new organization. Please note that you will not be able to create new entities in this window if you have not default set for all mandatory values! • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. If you leave the search key empty, the system automatically creates a numeric number. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName, where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.g. C Order). • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

97/461

• IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. • Upc: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar, Code 25, Code 39, Code 93, Code 128, UPC (A), UPC (E), EAN-13, EAN-8, ITF, ITF-14, ISBN, ISSN, JAN-13, JAN-8, POSTNET and FIM, MSI/Plessey, and Pharmacode) Custom code. Deprecated

13.5

AD OrgInfo

The Organization Info Tab is used to define an Organization’s address, DUNS number and Tax Identification number • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity. • DUNS: Used for EDI - For details see www.dnb.com/dunsno/list.htm • TaxID: The Tax ID field identifies the legal Identification number of this Entity. • PA Goal ID: The Performance Goal indicates what this users performance will be measured against. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor, Customer, Employee or Salesperson • Logo: • Reference Order: Uses Order document number as inout number

98/461

13.6

AD Session

History of Online or Web Sessions • AD Session ID: Online or Web Session Information • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • WebSession: Web Session identifier • Remote Addr: The Remote Address indicates an alternative or external address. • Remote Host: Remote Host • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed.

13.7

AD Preference

Defines preferences (default values) for a user. • AD Preference ID: Personal Preference, a default value that will be used by a user. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Window ID: The Window field identifies a unique Window in the system. • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • Attribute: Attribute name that will take the value. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. If you leave the search key empty, the system automatically creates a numeric number. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName, where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.g. C Order).

99/461

14

Warehouse, Shipper and Freigth

The Warehouse and Locators define each Warehouse, any Locators for that Warehouse and the Accounting parameters to be used for inventory in that Warehouse. The Shipper defines the different shipping providers used by an Organization. Freight Categories are used to calculate the Freight for the Shipper selected.

14.1

M Warehouse

Warehouse defines each Warehouse that is used to store products. • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. If you leave the search key empty, the system automatically creates a numeric number. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName, where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.g. C Order). • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity. • Separator: The Element Separator defines the delimiter printed between elements of the structure • IsShipper: This check indicates if the warehouse is a van that can receive and serve orders. • Shippercode: If warehouse is shipper type this code identifies the terminal in the van.

100/461

101/461 Figure 14: Warehouse, Shipper and Freigth

• FromDocumentNo: If warehouse is shipper type this field is the lowest range for the document numbers used by the terminal. • ToDocumentNo: If warehouse is shipper type this field is the highest range for the document numbers used by the terminal. • LocatorUnitsPerPallet: Custom code. Deprecated • Warehouse Size: Custom code. Deprecated

14.2

M Locator

The Locator defines any Locators for that Warehouse. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. If you leave the search key empty, the system automatically creates a numeric number. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName, where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.g. C Order). • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. • PriorityNo: The Relative Priority indicates the location to pick from first if an product is stored in more than one location. (0 = highest priority) • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. • X: The X dimension indicates the Aisle a product is located in. • Y: The Y dimension indicates the Bin a product is located in

102/461

• Z: The Z dimension indicates the Level a product is located in. • SizeMultiplier: Custom code. Deprecated • Invoicingtype: How to invoice a locator is being renting Custom code. Deprecated • M Locator Type ID: The ID identifies the unique type for the locator Custom code. Deprecated

14.3

M Warehouse Shipper

This table defines shipper path tracks. Each movil warehouse has a particular track. • M Warehouse Shipper ID: Shipper Warehouse • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor, Customer, Employee or Salesperson • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records

14.4

M Freight

Freight Rates for Shipper • M Freight ID: Freight Rate for Shipper • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Shipper ID: The Shipper is any entity which will provide shipping to or shipping from an Organization.

103/461

• M FreightCategory ID: Freight Categories are used to calculate the Freight for the Shipper selected • ValidFrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range • C Country ID: The Country defines a Country. Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document. • To Country ID: The To Country indicates the receiving country on a document • C Region ID: The Region identifies a unique Region for this Country. • To Region ID: The To Region indicates the receiving region on a document • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • FreightAmt: The Freight Amount indicates the amount charged for Freight in the document currency. • Freight Unit: It is the unit how the quantity is given. • Isprice: This field indicates if it is a fixed price or it is per unit. • Line Round: How units are rounded for each of the in-out lines. • Qtyfrom: Lowest quantity • Qtyto: Highest quantity • Total Round: How units are rounded for the whole in-out.

104/461

C Order). The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. the system automatically creates a numeric number.5 M FreightCategory Freight Categories are used to calculate the Freight for the Shipper selected • M FreightCategory ID: Freight Categories are used to calculate the Freight for the Shipper selected • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. If you leave the search key empty. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • M Shipper ID: The Shipper is any entity which will provide shipping to or shipping from an Organization. 105/461 . 14. You cannot share data between Clients.6 M Shipper The Shippers table defines any entity who will provide shipping to or shipping from an Organization. • Total Round: How units are rounded for the whole in-out.14. • Freight Unit: It is the unit how the quantity is given. comment or help about the use of this item. • Line Round: How units are rounded for each of the in-out lines. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.g. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record.

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 106/461 . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. This can include Vendor. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Customer. Employee or Salesperson • TrackingURL: The variable @TrackingNo@ in the URL is replaced by the actual tracking number of the shipment. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. vendors and employees. Greeting defines a greeting that is then associated with a Business Partner or Business Partner Contact. • IsFirstNameOnly: The First Name Only checkbox indicates that only the first name of this contact should print in greetings. Interest Areas reflect interest in a topic by a contact. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.1 C Greeting The Greeting table defines the way in which you will address business partners on documents. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display 107/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. These categories are used in order to choose which tax will be applied. Interest areas can be used for marketing campaigns. Business Partner Group allows to define the accounting parameters at a group level. Sales Region defines the different regions where you do business. • C Greeting ID: The Greeting identifies the greeting to print on correspondence. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value.2 C Greeting Trl This table contains greeting translation to different languages. Defines Tax Categories for bussines partners. • Greeting: The Greeting indicates what will print on letters sent to a Business Partner.15 Business partner Business Partner allows to define any party with whom you transact. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 15. This includes customers. 15.

108/461 Figure 15: Business partner .

If the Employee is also a Sales Representative then the check box should be selected. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Employee or Salesperson • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Customer defines a Business Partner who is a customer of this organization. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. 15. The entity could be a customer or/and a vendor or/and an employee. Customer. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.g. If the Customer check box is selected then the necessary fields will display. If you leave the search key empty. You cannot share data between Clients. This can include Vendor. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • Greeting: The Greeting indicates what will print on letters sent to a Business Partner. C Order).3 C BPartner The Business Partner table defines any entity with whom an organization transacts. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. You cannot share data between Clients. Employee defines a Business Partner who is an Employee of this organization. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. Vendor defines a Business Partner that is a Vendor for this Organization.• C Greeting ID: The Greeting identifies the greeting to print on correspondence. the system automatically creates a numeric number. 109/461 . If the Vendor check box is selected the necessary fields will display.

For details see www. • C BP Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners. If it is selected. • ReferenceNo: The reference number can be printed on orders and invoices to allow your business partner to faster identify your records. additional fields will display which further identify this vendor. • IsSalesRep: The Sales Rep checkbox indicates if this employee is also a sales representative.• Name2: Additional Name • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • IsVendor: The Vendor checkbox indicates if this Business Partner is a Vendor. • IsOneTime: • IsProspect: The Prospect checkbox indicates an entity that is an active prospect or customer.dnb. If it is select additional fields will display which further define this customer.htm • URL: The URL defines an online address for this Business Partner. • DUNS: Used for EDI . Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. additional fields will display which further identify this employee. • IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. • IsCustomer: The Customer checkbox indicates if this Business Partner is a customer. If it is selected.com/dunsno/list. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display 110/461 . • IsEmployee: The Employee checkbox indicates if this Business Partner is an Employee.

• TaxID: The Tax ID field identifies the legal Identification number of this Entity. so that you can track tax exempt transactions. This field displays only for Prospects. • IsTaxExempt: If a business partner is exempt from tax. • C InvoiceSchedule ID: The Invoice Schedule identifies the frequency used when generating invoices. • PotentialLifeTimeValue: The Potential Life Time Value is the anticipated revenue to be generated by this Business Partner. • FirstSale: The First Sale Date identifies the date of the first sale to this Business Partner • AcqusitionCost: The Acquisition Cost identifies the cost associated with making this prospect a customer. you need to set up a tax rate with a 0% rate and indicate that this is your tax exempt rate. • NumberEmployees: Indicates the number of employees for this Business Partner. For this. This is required for tax reporting. • NAICS: The NAICS/SIC identifies either of these codes that may be applicable to this Business Partner. • PaymentRule: The Payment Rule indicates the method of invoice payment. • ShareOfCustomer: The Share indicates the percentage of this Business Partner’s volume of the products supplied. 111/461 . • Rating: The Rating is used to differentiate the importance • SalesVolume: The Sales Volume indicates the total volume of sales for a Business Partner. the exempt tax rate is used. • ActualLifeTimeValue: The Actual Life Time Value is the recorded revenue to be generated by this Business Partner.

• C PaymentTerm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction. A standard number can be defined in the Business Partner (Customer) window. • PaymentRulePO: The Payment Rule indicates the method of purchase payment. • C Dunning ID: The Dunning indicates the rules and method of dunning for past due payments. • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing. • SO CreditUsed: The Credit Used indicates the total amount of open or unpaid invoices for this Business Partner. the trade discount percentage is calculated and applied resulting in the final price. Often Purchase Order numbers are given to print on Invoices for easier reference. margin and cost of items purchased or sold.• SO CreditLimit: The Credit Limit indicates the total amount allowed ’on account’. • PO DiscountSchema ID: 112/461 . If this is exceeded a warning message will be generated. • M DiscountSchema ID: After calculation of the (standard) price. • IsDiscountPrinted: The Discount Printed Checkbox indicates if the discount will be printed on the document. • POReference: The business partner order reference is the order reference for this specific transaction. • SO Description: The Order Description identifies the standard description to use on orders for this Customer. • PO PriceList ID: Identifies the price list used by a Vendor for products purchased by this organization.

department. • DeliveryRule: The Delivery Rule indicates when an order should be delivered. Not implemented yet • Invoice PrintFormat ID: You need to define a Print Format to print the document. 113/461 . You can share data between organizations. • SOCreditStatus: For Documentation only Not implemented yet • AD Forced Org ID: An organization is a unit of your client or legal entity . Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. • C Greeting ID: The Greeting identifies the greeting to print on correspondence.) • BPartner Parent ID: The parent (organization) of the Business Partner for reporting purposes. • DocumentCopies: The Document Copies indicates the number of copies of each document that will be generated.• PO PaymentTerm ID: The PO Payment Term indicates the payment term that will be used when this purchase order becomes an invoice. • FreightCostRule: The Freight Cost Rule indicates the method used when charging for freight.examples are store. when a line is complete or as the products become available. For example. • InvoiceRule: The Invoice Rule defines how a Business Partner is invoiced and the frequency of invoicing. etc. • SendEMail: Send emails with document attached (e. Invoice.g. Delivery Note. will the order be picked up or shipped. • SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. For example should the order be delivered when the entire order is complete. • DeliveryViaRule: The Delivery Via indicates how the products should be delivered.

-Order (C Order ID) 3. 3 different fix month days can be defined. if you want to create different invoices for each ship location for a customer. • FixMonthDay2: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due.-Campaign (C Campaign ID) 11.-Transaction organization (AD OrgTrx ID) 14.-User defined 2 (User2) For example.-Sales representative (SalesRep ID) 7.-Ship location (C BPartner Location ID) 6. Deprecated • STORAGEPAYMENTRULE: Custom code. 3 different fix month days can be defined. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected. The value is used as a binary code with 15 digits: 1.-Invoice location (BillTo ID) 5. break into different invoices if the related values are different. 114/461 . Deprecated • ShowPriceInOrder: When not checked prices are not shown (left blank) in the printed order document • Invoicegrouping: For scheduled invoicing. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected.-Project (C Project ID) 12. 3 different fix month days can be defined.-Activity (C Activity ID) 13. • Fixmonthday3: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due.-Shipment (M InOut ID) 4.-Payment rule (PaymentRule) 8.-Currency (C Currency ID) 10. Custom code.-User defined 1 (User1) 15.-Order organization (AD Org ID) 2.-Payment term (C PaymentTerm ID) 9. use the value By ship location (000010000000000) • Fixmonthday: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due.• M Wh Schedule ID: The warehouse schedule ID identifies a unique schedule for renting locators. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected.

ISBN. ITF-14. Code 39. • PO Fixmonthday3: The Fix Month Day for Purchases indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. • Last Days: This field is used Copy Lines From in Order tab to specify the consumptions made in the last n days. This field only displays if the fixed due date checkbox is selected. • PO Fixmonthday2: The Fix Month Day for Purchases indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. 3 different Fix Month Days can be defined. • PO Bp Taxcategory ID: PO Bussines Partner Tax Category is a category defined for apply default taxes for procurement transactions. This field only displays if the fixed due date checkbox is selected. Code 25. This field only displays if the fixed due date checkbox is selected. POSTNET and FIM. EAN-8. MSI/Plessey.• Ismanager: Custom code. JAN-13. UPC (E). Deprecated • Isworker: Custom code. 3 different Fix Month Days can be defined. ITF. Code 93. Deprecated • Managers: Custom code. • SO Bankaccount ID: Default Customer Bankaccount • SO Bp Taxcategory ID: Bussines Partner Tax Category is a category defined for apply default taxes for sales transactions. 115/461 . Deprecated • UPC: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar. ISSN. 3 different Fix Month Days can be defined. JAN-8. EAN-13. and Pharmacode) • Invoice Printformat: You need to define a Print Format to print the document. Code 128. • PO Bankaccount ID: Default Vendor Bank Account • PO Fixmonthday: The Fix Month Day for Purchases indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. UPC (A).

116/461 . • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. A business partner may have multiple location records. • IsPayFrom: The Pay From Address checkbox indicates if this location is the address the Business Partner pays from.• C Salary Category ID: Indicates a salary category 15. • Fax: The Fax identifies a facsimile number for this Business Partner or Location • ISDN: The ISDN identifies a ISDN or Modem line number. • IsRemitTo: The Remit to Address checkbox indicates if this location is the address to which we should send payments to this Business Partner. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • IsBillTo: The Bill to Address checkbox indicates if this location is the Bill to Address for this Business Partner • IsShipTo: The Ship to Address checkbox indicates if this location is the address to use when shipping orders to this Business Partner.4 C BPartner Location The Location defines the physical location of a business partner. You cannot share data between Clients. • Phone: The Phone field identifies a telephone number • Phone2: The 2nd Phone field identifies an alternate telephone number.

ISSN. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. Fiscal addresses are shown in all documents. EAN-8. POSTNET and FIM.• C SalesRegion ID: The Sales Region indicates a specific area of sales coverage. This can include Vendor. the system automatically creates a numeric number. ITF. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Customer. ITF-14. C Order). Code 93. EAN-13. 117/461 . ISBN. UPC (E). • UPC: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar. • IsTaxLocation: This fieldindicates that this location is a fiscal address. UPC (A). • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. Code 128.g. You cannot share data between Clients. If you leave the search key empty. • C SalesRegion ID: The Sales Region indicates a specific area of sales coverage. Code 39. MSI/Plessey. Code 25.5 C SalesRegion The Sales Region defines the different regions where you do business. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Employee or Salesperson • C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Sales Regions can be used when generating reports or calculating commissions. and Pharmacode) 15. JAN-13. JAN-8.

7 C BP TaxCategory Defines Tax Categories for bussines partners. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. If you leave the search key empty. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. the system automatically creates a numeric number. You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value.g. 15. Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. C Order). • SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. 118/461 . • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record.• IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. These categories are used in order to choose which tax will be applied. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.6 C BP Group The Business Partner Group allows for the association of business partners for reporting and accounting defaults. 15. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. • C BP Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners.

You cannot share data between Clients.• C BP TaxCategory ID: Bussines Partner Tax Category is a category defined for apply default taxes for procurement transactions. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Employee or Salesperson • C Bank ID: The Bank is a unique identifier of a Bank for this Organization or for a Business Partner with whom this Organization transacts. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.8 C BP BankAccount The Define Bank Account Tab defines the banking information for this business partner. This can include Vendor. You cannot share data between Clients. • C BP BankAccount ID: The Partner Bank Account identifies the bank account to be used for this Business Partner • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • RoutingNo: The Bank Routing Number (ABA Number) identifies a legal Bank. • BankAccountType: The Bank Account Type field indicates the type of account (savings. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. It is used in routing checks and electronic transactions. This data is used for processing payments and remittances. • AccountNo: The Account Number indicates the Number assigned to this account 119/461 . Customer. 15. • IsACH: The ACH checkbox indicates if this Bank Account accepts ACH transactions. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. checking etc) this account is defined as.

• CreditCardVV: The Credit Card Verification indicates the verification code on the credit card (AMEX 4 digits on front. • A Name: The Name of the Credit Card or Account holder.Visa 3 digits back) • CreditCardExpMM: The Expiry Month indicates the expiry month for this credit card. • A Street: The Street Address of the Credit Card or Account holder. • CreditCardExpYY: The Expiry Year indicates the expiry year for this credit card. • A City: The Account City indicates the City of the Credit Card or Account holder • A State: The State of the Credit Card or Account holder • A Zip: The Zip Code of the Credit Card or Account Holder. 120/461 . MC. • A EMail: The EMail Address indicates the EMail address off the Credit Card or Account holder. • R AvsAddr: The Address Verified indicates if the address has been verified by the Credit Card Company. • A Ident DL: The Driver’s License being used as identification. • CreditCardNumber: The Credit Card number indicates the number on the credit card. without blanks or spaces. • A Ident SSN: The Social Security number being used as identification.• CreditCardType: The Credit Card drop down list box is used for selecting the type of Credit Card presented for payment. • R AvsZip: The Zip Verified indicates if the zip code has been verified by the Credit Card Company.

• A Country: Account Country Name • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. • Password: The Password indicates the Password for this User Id. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 15. The User identifies a unique user in the system. • Supervisor ID: The Supervisor indicates who will be used for forwarding and escalating issues for this user. 121/461 . This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • Bank Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system.9 AD User The User Tab defines the log in for Users who have access to the system. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients.smith@company.com). Passwords are required to identify authorized users. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. joe. • Email: The Email Address is the Electronic Mail ID for this User and should be fully qualified (e.g. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • PA Goal ID: The Performance Goal indicates what this users performance will be measured against.

• EmailUser: The user name in the mail system is usually the string before the @ of your email address. Customer. • Comments: The Comments field allows for free form entry of additional information. • Fax: The Fax identifies a facsimile number for this Business Partner or Location • LastContact: The Last Contact indicates the date that this Business Partner Contact was last contacted.• PA GoalPrivate ID: The Personal Goals displays goals that a user will set for themselves. • Title: The Title indicates the name that an entity is referred to as. • EmailUserPW: Required if the mail server requires authentification to send emails. Employee or Salesperson • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • Birthday: Birthday or Anniversary day 122/461 . • Phone: The Phone field identifies a telephone number • Phone2: The 2nd Phone field identifies an alternate telephone number. Required if the mail server requires authentification to send emails. • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • C Greeting ID: The Greeting identifies the greeting to print on correspondence. • LastResult: The Last Result identifies the result of the last contact made. This can include Vendor.

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. and inter-organization transactions. Interest areas can be used for marketing campaigns. Not implemented yet • Firstname: First Name of the contact • Lastname: Last name of the contact • UserName: Name that identifies the user in the System 15. The flag indicates. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 123/461 . • R InterestArea ID: Interest Areas reflect interest in a topic by a contact.• AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization).10 R InterestArea Interest Areas reflect interest in a topic by a contact.11 R ContactInterest Interest Area can be used for Marketing Campaigns The subscription is used to follow up the contacts which are subscribed to an specific area of interest and also add new subscribers. that this record was entered or created via Self-Service or that the user can change it via the Self-Service functionality. • IsSelfService: Self-Service allows users to enter data or update their data. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. You cannot share data between Clients. 15. with centralized services. Interest areas can be used for marketing campaigns.

You cannot share data between Clients. Interest areas can be used for marketing campaigns. the customer opted out (unsubscribed) and cannot receive mails for the Interest Area • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • SubscribeDate: Date the contact subscribe the interest area • OptOutDate: If the field has a date.• R InterestArea ID: Interest Areas reflect interest in a topic by a contact. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact 124/461 .

The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. On the standard invoice. • DocumentNote: The Document Note is used for recording any additional information regarding this product. You cannot share data between Clients. 125/461 . • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • NetDays: Indicates the number of days after invoice date that payment is due. • IsDueFixed: The Fixed Due Date checkbox indicates if invoices using this payment term will be due on a fixed day of the month. • AfterDelivery: The After Delivery checkbox indicates that payment is due after delivery as opposed to after invoicing. 16. • GraceDays: The Grace Days indicates the number of days after the due date to send the first dunning letter. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. the Name and the Document Note • C PaymentTerm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.1 C PaymentTerm The Payment Term defines the different payments terms that you offer to your Business Partners when paying invoices and also those terms which your Vendors offer you for payment of your invoices.16 Payment term Payment Terms defines the different payment terms that you offer your customers and that are offered to you by your vendors. This field displays only if the send dunning letters checkbox has been selected.

126/461 Figure 16: Payment term .

This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected. • Discount2: The Discount indicates the discount applied or taken as a percentage. 3 different fix month days can be defined. • IsValid: The element passed the validation check 127/461 . The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName.• FixMonthCutoff: The Fix Month Cutoff indicates the last day invoices can have to be included in the current due date. This field will only display if the fixed due date checkbox is selected. • DiscountDays: The Discount Days indicates the number of days that payment must be received in to be eligible for the stated discount. C Order). A 0 indicates the same month. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • IsNextBusinessDay: The Next Business Day checkbox indicates that payment is due on the next business day after invoice or delivery. • NetDay: When defined. • FixMonthOffset: The Fixed Month Offset indicates the number of months from the current month to indicate an invoice is due. If you leave the search key empty. This field only displays when the fixed due date checkbox has been selected. a 1 the following month. • Discount: The Discount indicates the discount applied or taken as a percentage. the system automatically creates a numeric number. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. • FixMonthDay: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due.g. overwrites the number of net days with the relative number of days to the the day defined. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. • DiscountDays2: The Discount Days indicates the number of days that payment must be received in to be eligible for the stated discount.

3 different fix month days can be defined. 3 different fix month days can be defined. • Netdays: Indicates the number of days after invoice date that payment is due. 128/461 . It will also control the display order of the lines within a document.2 C Paymenttermline Line in a Pyament Term • C Paymenttermline ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Isduefixed: The Fixed Due Date checkbox indicates if invoices using this payment term will be due on a fixed day of the month. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • Fixmonthday3: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. • Percentage: Percentage of an amount (up to 100) • Onremainder: • Excludetax: • Paymentrule: The Payment Rule indicates the method of invoice payment. • C Paymentterm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction.• FixMonthDay2: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. 16. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected. You cannot share data between Clients.

overwrites the number of net days with the relative number of days to the the day defined. • FixMonthDay2: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. 129/461 .• Fixmonthcutoff: The Fix Month Cutoff indicates the last day invoices can have to be included in the current due date. 16. A 0 indicates the same month. • Fixmonthday3: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. a 1 the following month. 3 different fix month days can be defined. 3 different fix month days can be defined.3 C PaymentTerm Trl The translation defines the payment terms translations for different languages • C PaymentTerm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction. • Fixmonthday: The Fix Month Day indicates the day of the month that invoices are due. This field will only display if the fixed due date checkbox is selected. 3 different fix month days can be defined. This field only displays when the fixed due date checkbox has been selected. • Fixmonthoffset: The Fixed Month Offset indicates the number of months from the current month to indicate an invoice is due. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected. • Netday: When defined. You cannot share data between Clients. This field is displayed only when the fixed due date checkbox is selected. • Isnextbusinessday: The Next Business Day checkbox indicates that payment is due on the next business day after invoice or delivery. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • DocumentNote: The Document Note is used for recording any additional information regarding this product. 130/461 . • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.

JAN-13. Update Name. ITF-14.g. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. UPC (A). etc.17 Product Product Category defines different groups of products. These products include those sold to customers. ISSN. JAN-8. Code 128. Code 39. in the Resource and don’t change it in the product. Unit of Measure. The product for the resource is automatically created and synchronized. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. C Order). EAN-8. UPC (E). POSTNET and FIM. EAN-13. • DocumentNote: The Document Note is used for recording any additional information regarding this product. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. the system automatically creates a numeric number. comment or help about the use of this item. ISBN. Product defines all products used by an organization. • UPC: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Code 93. • Help: The Help field contains a hint.1 M Product Defines each product and identifies it for use in price lists and orders. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Maintain your Resources. 131/461 . Vendor Details displays and maintains all products for a selected Vendor. used in the manufacture of products sold to customers and products purchased by an organization. Code 25. ITF. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. 17. The Location is the default location when receiving the stored products. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. If you leave the search key empty. You cannot share data between Clients. MSI/Plessey.

132/461 Figure 17: Product .

This is used for products that consist of a bill of materials • C RevenueRecognition ID: The Revenue Recognition indicates how revenue will be recognized for this product 133/461 . Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. • IsPurchased: The Purchased check box indicates if this product is purchased by this organization. • IsBOM: The Bill of Materials check box indicates if this product consists of a bill of materials. It may be used for an additional bar code symbols or your own schema. • IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. • IsStocked: The Stocked check box indicates if this product is stocked by this Organization. • IsSold: The Sold check box indicates if this product is sold by this organization.and Pharmacode) • SKU: The SKU indicates a user defined stock keeping unit. • IsVerified: The Verified check box indicates if the configuration of this product has been verified. • IsPickListPrintDetails: The Print Details on Pick List indicates that the BOM element products will print on the Pick List as opposed to this product. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. • IsInvoicePrintDetails: The Print Details on Invoice indicates that the BOM element products will print on the Invoice as opposed to this product.

Sales Tax or Value Added Tax. For example. 134/461 . • Classification: The Classification can be used to optionally group products. • Volume: The Volume indicates the volume of the product in the Volume UOM of the Client • Weight: The Weight indicates the weight of the product in the Weight UOM of the Client • ShelfWidth: The Shelf Width indicates the width dimension required on a shelf for a product • ShelfHeight: The Shelf Height indicates the height dimension required on a shelf for a product • ShelfDepth: The Shelf Depth indicates the depth dimension required on a shelf for a product • UnitsPerPallet: The Units per Pallet indicates the number of units of this product which fit on a pallet. • DiscontinuedBy: The Discontinued By indicates the individual who discontinued this product • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • C TaxCategory ID: The Tax Category provides a method of grouping similar taxes. • S Resource ID: The ID identifies a unique resource Not implemented yet • Discontinued: The Discontinued check box indicates a product that has been discontinued.• M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. Product categories are used for pricing.

Customer. • AD Image ID: Defines a system image • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • DownloadURL: Semicolon separated list of URLs to be downloaded or distributed • M FreightCategory ID: Freight Categories are used to calculate the Freight for the Shipper selected • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. otherwise the guarantee date is calculated by adding the days to the delivery date.• S ExpenseType ID: Expense report type • ProductType: The type of product also determines accounting consequences. 135/461 . Employee or Salesperson • Ispriceprinted: It allows you to print or not the price of a product in a document so you can summary many products in just one. • ImageURL: URL of image. there is no limit to the availability or guarantee. • VersionNo: Version Number Not implemented yet • M AttributeSet ID: Define Product Attribute Sets to add additional attributes and values to the product. You need to define a Attribute Set if you want to enable Serial and Lot Number tracking. This can include Vendor. The image can be a gif. but retrieved at runtime. The image is not stored in the database. jpeg or png. • DescriptionURL: URL for the description • GuaranteeDays: If the value is 0. • R MailText ID: The Mail Template indicates the mail template for return messages.

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.2 M Product Category The Product Category defines unique groupings of products. You cannot share data between Clients. Deprecated • Upc2: Custom code. 136/461 . Deprecated • Greenpoint Uom: Custom code. • MA Producttype ID: • Production: A product that is used for production plans 17. Deprecated • Calculated: Indicates that the record has been calculated. Product categories can be used in building price lists. • MA Processplan ID: Indicates a process plan. Product categories are used for pricing. • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to.• Name2: Additional Name • Costtype: Different types of cost • Coststd: The value of the standard cost • Stock Min: Minimum stock of a product Not implemented yet • Enforce Attribute: For differing the stock of a product by the attribute Not implemented yet • Bundle Uom: Custom code.

where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • PlannedMargin: The Planned Margin Percentage indicates the anticipated margin percentage for this project or project line • A Asset Group ID: The group of assets determines default accounts.• Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 17.g.3 M Substitute The Substitute Tab defines products which may be used as a replacement for the selected product. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. If you leave the search key empty. C Order). 137/461 . assets are created when delivering the asset. • Substitute ID: The Substitute identifies the product to be used as a substitute for this product. If an asset group is selected in the product category. the system automatically creates a numeric number.

5 M Product Customer Asigns products to customers • M Product Customer ID: Product assignation to customer 138/461 . • BOMQty: The BOM Quantity indicates the quantity of the product in its Unit of Measure (multiplication) • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • BOMType: Type of Bill of Materials 17. • M ProductBOM ID: The BOM Product identifies an element that is part of this Bill of Materials. A Bill of Material (BOM) is one or more Products or BOMs. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. You cannot share data between Clients.4 M Product BOM The Bill of Materials defines those products that are generated from other products. Available Quantity: . • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document.The available quantity of a no • M Product BOM ID: The Bill of Materials defines each product that are generated from other products.17.Stored BOMs have to be created via Production .

EAN-13. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • M Product Org ID: Details for a product in different organizations. • UPC: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar. You cannot share data between Clients.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Code 25. UPC (A).6 M Product Org Defines details for a product in different organizations. UPC (E). The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • MRP Planner ID: Identifies a planner of the MRP. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. ITF. Code 39. EAN-8. This can include Vendor. JAN-13. You cannot share data between Clients. MSI/Plessey. • MRP Planningmethod ID: Identifies a method for filtering the input for planning processes. JAN-8. Code 128. POSTNET and FIM. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. ITF-14. 139/461 . and Pharmacode) • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. Customer. ISSN. Code 93. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. ISBN. Employee or Salesperson 17.

• M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.• Stockmin: Minimun Stock • Qtytype: Quantity Type • Qtymin: Minumun Quantity. • Qtystd: Quantity Standard • Qtymax: • Capacity: Capacity per day • Delaymin: Minimun number of days to complete the transaction 17. You cannot share data between Clients. The Product Details allows you to display and maintain all products for a selected Vendor.7 M Product PO The Purchasing defines the pricing and rules ( pack quantity. Customer. This can include Vendor. UPC. minimum order quantity) for each product. • IsCurrentVendor: The Current Vendor indicates if prices are used and Product is reordered from this vendor • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record 140/461 . • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. Employee or Salesperson • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

This allows you to enter future prices for products which will become effective when appropriate. Code 25. JAN-8. • Order Pack: The Order Pack Quantity indicates the number of units in each pack of this product. ISSN. • PricePO: The PO Price indicates the price for a product per the purchase order. UPC (E). • DiscontinuedBy: The Discontinued By indicates the individual who discontinued this product • Order Min: The Minimum Order Quantity indicates the smallest quantity of this product which can be ordered. MSI/Plessey. • PriceLastInv: The Last Invoice Price indicates the last price paid (per the invoice) for this product. • UPC: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar. • VendorProductNo: The Vendor Product Number identifies the number used by the vendor for this product. ITF. and Pharmacode) • VendorCategory: The Vendor Category identifies the category used by the vendor for this product. EAN-8. Code 128. ITF-14. • Discontinued: The Discontinued check box indicates a product that has been discontinued. 141/461 . POSTNET and FIM. ISBN. • PriceEffective: The Price Effective indicates the date this price is for. • PriceLastPO: The Last PO Price indicates the last price paid (per the purchase order) for this product. Code 93. UPC (A).• PriceList: The List Price is the official List Price in the document currency. JAN-13. EAN-13. Code 39.

• CostPerOrder: The Cost Per Order indicates the fixed charge levied when an order for this product is placed. • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. • DeliveryTime Promised: The Promised Delivery Time indicates the number of days between the order date and the date that delivery was promised. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 142/461 . This is used for automated ordering. • DeliveryTime Actual: The Actual Delivery Time indicates the number of days elapsed between placing an order and the delivery of the order • QualityRating: The Quality Rating indicates how a vendor is rated (higher number = higher quality) • RoyaltyAmt: Not implemented yet • Manufacturer: Manufacturer • Qtystd: Quantity Standard • Qtytype: Quantity Type • Capacity: Capacity per day 17. You cannot share data between Clients.8 M Replenish The Replenishment defines the type of replenishment quantities.

• Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. You cannot share data between Clients. Employee or Salesperson • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This does not necessarily need to be the unit which is used for the invoice. Using templates is a good way to avoid having to repeat the entry of each line of the order when there are few changes. • Level Min: Indicates the minimum quantity of this product to be stocked in inventory.• ReplenishType: The Replenish Type indicates if this product will be manually reordered. • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product. 17.10 M Product UOM Users can define the unit of the order. • Type Template: Specifies the template type for the product.9 M Product Template The product template is used to configure standard orders for a business partner. This can include Vendor. Can be define as a template for orders. 143/461 . 17. • M Product Template ID: Product template • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. For instance diskettes are stocked and accounted in units while are bought in boxes of 10. Customer. • Level Max: Indicates the maximum quantity of this product to be stocked in inventory. ordered when the quantity is below the minimum quantity or ordered when it is below the maximum quantity.

17. 144/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. • Datefrom: The Date From indicates the starting date of a range.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Dateto: The Date To indicates the end date of a range (inclusive) • Ismanual: The Manual check box indicates if the process will done manually. • Cumqty: Cumulate quantity. • Price: The Price indicates the Price for a product or service. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • M Inoutline ID: The Shipment/Receipt Line indicates a unique line in a Shipment/Receipt document • C Invoiceline ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice.11 M Costing Stores the average costs for purchases and productions • M Costing ID: Average costs for purchases and productions • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. You cannot share data between Clients.

• DocumentNote: The Document Note is used for recording any additional information regarding this product. You cannot share data between Clients. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. • M Productionline ID: The Production Line indicates the production document line (if applicable) for this transaction • Isproduction: Sets the record id for production. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 145/461 .• Costtype: Different types of cost • Ispermanent: • Cost: Cost amount. 17. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.12 M Product Trl The translation defines the product name for different languages • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.

working day. • CostingPrecision: The Costing Precision defines the number of decimal places that amounts will be rounded to when performing costing calculations. minute. • StdPrecision: The Standard Precision defines the number of decimal places that amounts will be rounded to for accounting transactions and documents. If you order 8 rolls. E. The system provides some automatic conversions between units of measures (e. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.18 Unit of Measure Unit of Measure is used to define non monetary units of measure. • X12DE355: The Unit of Measure Code indicates the EDI X12 Code Data Element 355 (Unit or Basis for Measurement) • UOMSymbol: The Symbol identifies the Symbol to be displayed and printed for a Unit of Measure • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 18.g. • Breakdown: Indicates if the line order in that unit of mesaure has to be breaken down on the shipment document.g. hour. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. the shipment document must show eight lines of 1 roll 146/461 . It also defines the conversion between units of measure. day. You cannot share data between Clients.) if they are not explicitly defined here. etc.1 C UOM Unit of Measure defines a non monetary Unit of Measure.

147/461 Figure 18: Unit of Measure .

hour. • DivideRate: To convert Source number to Target number. etc. • UOMSymbol: The Symbol identifies the Symbol to be displayed and printed for a Unit of Measure 148/461 .Conversions need to be dir • C UOM Conversion ID: The UOM Conversion identifies a unique to and from Unit of Measure.2 C UOM Conversion The Conversion defines the rates for converting a Unit of Measure. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • C UOM To ID: The UOM To indicates the destination UOM for a UOM Conversion pair. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. day. the Source is divided by the divide rate. The system provides some automatic conversions between units of measures (e. conversion rate and conversion date range. • MultiplyRate: To convert Source number to Target number. then the Divide Rate will be automatically calculated. working day. If the Multiply Rate is entered. If you enter a Divide Rate. the Multiply Rate will be automatically calculated. minute.3 C UOM Trl Unit of Measure translations to different languages • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 18.g. You cannot share data between Clients.) if they are not explicitly defined here. the Source is multiplied by the multiply rate.18.

149/461 . • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

like the individual Serial or Lot Numbers or Guarantee Date of a product instance. Size • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You need to define a Attribute Set if you want to enable Serial and Lot Number tracking. • IsList: If the attribute has a predefined list of values.g. you can select it by choosing one of the valid values. 150/461 . If it is an Instance Attribute. You cannot share data between Clients. • M AttributeSearch ID: Attributes are specific to a Product Attribute Set (e. all instances of the product share the attribute (e. etc.M. 19.g. Size for T-Shirts: S. Product Attribute like Color.M. you define a search sttribute. This eases the maintenance of the individual product attribute. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. If you have multiple attributes and want to search under a common sttribute. the individual instance of the product has this attribute . Size. color=green). • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. all products have the same value. • IsInstanceAttribute: If selected. Size. Example: have one Size search attribute combining the values of all different sizes (Size for Dress Shirt XL. The Attribute Search allows you to have all values available for selection.L). • IsMandatory: The Mandatory checkbox indicates if the field is required for a record to be save to the database.19 Attribute Define Product Attribute Sets to add additional attributes and values to the product. etc. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.XS). If not selected.L. • M Attribute ID: Product Attribute like Color.S.1 M Attribute Product Attribute like Color. Otherwise you can enter the attribute value manually.

151/461 Figure 19: Attribute .

large. You need to define a Attribute Set if you want to enable Serial and Lot Number tracking. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • M AttributeSet ID: Define Product Attribute Sets to add additional attributes and values to the product. You cannot share data between Clients.) • M AttributeValue ID: Individual value of a product attribute (e.g. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. you can define Serial Numbers • M SerNoCtl ID: Definition to create Serial numbers for Products • IsLot: For individual products.3 M AttributeValue Individual value of a product attribute (e.2 M AttributeSet Define Product Attribute Sets to add additional attributes and values to the product.g. You need to define a Attribute Set if you want to enable Serial and Lot Number tracking. there is no limit to the availability or guarantee. green.. • IsSerNo: For individual products. large. green. otherwise the guarantee date is calculated by adding the days to the delivery date. . • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • IsLockable: This check indicates that the product is locked in the warehouse and it cannot be taken out of it. you can define a guarantee or expiry date • GuaranteeDays: If the value is 0. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.) 152/461 .19. you can define Lot Numbers • M LotCtl ID: Definition to create Lot numbers for Products • IsGuaranteeDate: For individual products. 19. ..

4 M AttributeUse Attributes and Attribute Values used for the product • M Attribute ID: Product Attribute like Color. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. Size • M AttributeSet ID: Define Product Attribute Sets to add additional attributes and values to the product.g. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 19. If you leave the search key empty. • M Attribute ID: Product Attribute like Color. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You need to define a Attribute Set if you want to enable Serial and Lot Number tracking.5 M AttributeSetInstance Values for a individual instance of attributes • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes 153/461 . the system automatically creates a numeric number. Size • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records 19. You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. C Order). The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • Lot: The Lot Number indicates the specific lot that a product was part of. the system automatically creates a numeric number. green. large.) • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. • M AttributeValue ID: Individual value of a product attribute (e. Size • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. It can only be used when the quantity is 1. If you leave the search key empty. • SerNo: The Serial Number identifies a tracked.g. • GuaranteeDate: Date when the normal guarantee or availability expires • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. warranted product. • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • M Attribute ID: Product Attribute like Color. • M Lot ID: The individual Lot of a Product 19.6 M AttributeInstance Each of the values that an attribute has been set to. 154/461 . You need to define a Attribute Set if you want to enable Serial and Lot Number tracking.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. C Order). The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName.g. You cannot share data between Clients. • M AttributeSet ID: Define Product Attribute Sets to add additional attributes and values to the product. You cannot share data between Clients. ..

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. products. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. Different price adjustments can be configured for business partners. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. margin and cost of items purchased or sold. partners groups and product categories. This is also known as the gross price. Price lists determine currency and tax treatment. • IsSOPriceList: The Sales Price List check box indicates if this price list is used for sales transactions. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 20.20 Pricing Trade discount schema calculates the trade discount percentage Price List generates product price lists for your Business Partners. • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing. Price list versions allow to maintain parallel lists for different date ranges. You cannot share data between Clients.1 M PriceList Price lists determine currency of the document as well as tax treatment. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record 155/461 . • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • BasePriceList ID: The Base Price List identifies the default price list to be used if a product is not found on the selected price list Not implemented yet • IsTaxIncluded: The Tax Included checkbox indicates if the prices include tax.

156/461 Figure 20: Pricing .

• M DiscountSchema ID: After calculation of the (standard) price. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. margin and cost of items purchased or sold.• EnforcePriceLimit: The Enforce Price Limit check box indicates that prices cannot be below the limit price in Orders.2 M PriceList Version Price lists are automatically created based on Product Purchasing Information and the Vendor Category Discount.The other alternative is to copy them from existing pricelists and the re-calculate them. • ValidFrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range • ProcCreate: • M Pricelist Version Base ID: The Base Price List identifies the Base Pricelist used for calculating prices (the source) • M Pricelist Version Generate: 157/461 . 20. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Invoices are not checked.You can also re-calculate the pricelist by referencin • M PriceList Version ID: Each Price List can have multiple versions. The most common use is to indicate the dates that a Price List is valid for. the trade discount percentage is calculated and applied resulting in the final price. • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing. You cannot share data between Clients.

20. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • PriceStd: The Standard Price indicates the standard or normal price for a product on this price list • PriceLimit: The Price Limit indicates the lowest price for a product stated in the Price List Currency. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. the trade discount percentage is calculated and applied resulting in the final price. The Pricing Tab displays the List. You cannot share data between Clients. The Price List displays the prices for a product based on the selected price list. 20. Standard and Limit prices for each price list a product is contained in.4 M DiscountSchema Trade discount schema calculates the trade discount percentage • M DiscountSchema ID: After calculation of the (standard) price.3 M ProductPrice The Pricing displays the List. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • PriceList: The List Price is the official List Price in the document currency. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The most common use is to indicate the dates that a Price List is valid for. 158/461 . Standard and Limit prices for each price list a product is contained in. • M PriceList Version ID: Each Price List can have multiple versions.

159/461 .The parameters listed here allow to copy and calculate pricelists. you enter how the list.¡BR¿The calculation:¡UL¿¡LI¿Copy and convert price from referenced price list¡LI¿result plus Surcharge Amount¡L • M DiscountSchemaLine ID: For the Pricelist Discount Type.5 M DiscountSchemaLine Pricelists are created based on Product Purchase and Category Discounts. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to.• ValidFrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range Not implemented yet • DiscountType: Type of procedure used to calculate the trade discount percentage Not implemented yet • Script: Use Java language constructs to define the result of the calculation Not implemented yet • FlatDiscount: Not implemented yet • IsQuantityBased: The calculation of the trade discount level is based on the quantity of the order and not the value amount of the order Not implemented yet • CumulativeLevel: Not implemented yet • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • M DiscountSchema ID: After calculation of the (standard) price. 20. Product categories are used for pricing. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. standard and limit price is calculated. the trade discount percentage is calculated and applied resulting in the final price. You cannot share data between Clients.

• List MaxAmt: The List Price Max Margin indicates the maximum margin for a product. A negative amount indicates the percentage which will be added to the base price.• C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. 160/461 . For example. Employee or Salesperson • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. This allows you to enter multiple rates for the same currency pair. • ConversionRateType: The Conversion Rate Type indicates the type of conversion rate. The conversion rate chosen must include this date in it’s date range • List Base: The List Price Base indicates the price to use as the basis for the calculation of a new price list. The margin is calculated by subtracting the original list price from the newly calculated price. one rate may be used for Spot conversions and a different rate for Revaluations. • List MinAmt: The List Price Min Margin indicates the minimum margin for a product.00 then it is ignored. If this field contains 0. This can include Vendor. If this field contains 0. • List Rounding: The List Price Rounding indicates how the final list price will be rounded.00 then it is ignored. Customer. • ConversionDate: The Conversion Date identifies the date used for currency conversion. • List AddAmt: The List Price Surcharge Amount indicates the amount to be added to the price prior to multiplication. • List Discount: The List Price Discount Percentage indicates the percentage discount which will be subtracted from the base price. The margin is calculated by subtracting the original list price from the newly calculated price. • List Fixed: Fixes List Price (not calculated) • Std Base: The Standard Price Base indicates the price to use as the basis for the calculation of a new price standard.

00 then it is ignored. • Limit AddAmt: Indicates the amount to be added to the Limit price prior to multiplication. The margin is calculated by subtracting the original Standard price from the newly calculated price. The margin is calculated by subtracting the original limit price from the newly calculated price.00 then it is ignored. The margin is calculated by subtracting the original limit price from the newly calculated price. If this field contains 0. • Std Rounding: The Standard Price Rounding indicates how the final Standard price will be rounded. The margin is calculated by subtracting the original Standard price from the newly calculated price. 161/461 . If this field contains 0. A negative amount indicates the percentage which will be added to the base price. if negative it will be added to base price • Limit Rounding: A drop down list box which indicates the rounding (if any) will apply to the final prices in this price list.00 then it is ignored. • Std Fixed: Fixed Standard Price (not calculated) • Limit Base: Identifies the price to be used as the base for calculating a new price list. • Limit MaxAmt: Indicates the maximum margin for a product. • Std Discount: The Standard Price Discount Percentage indicates the percentage discount which will be subtracted from the base price. • Limit MinAmt: Indicates the minimum margin for a product. • Std MinAmt: The Standard Price Min Margin indicates the minimum margin for a product. • Limit Discount: Indicates the discount in percent to be subtracted from base.00 then it is ignored. • Std MaxAmt: The Standard Price Max Margin indicates the maximum margin for a product. If this field contains 0. If this field contains 0.• Std AddAmt: The Standard Price Surcharge Amount indicates the amount to be added to the price prior to multiplication.

The offer can be percentual. • BP Group Selection: Defines the way Business Partner Groups will be selected (including or excluding the taken ones) • Product Selection: Defines the way Products will be selected (including or excluding the taken ones) 162/461 . You cannot share data between Clients.6 M Offer The Price Adjustments has a vigence period and are applicated for the configurated business partners.• Limit Fixed: Fixed Limit Price (not calculated) 20. fixed or set. • Dateto: The Date To indicates the end date of a range (inclusive) • BPartner Selection: Business Partner Selection Mode is the way Business Partners will be selected. • Addamt: Fixed discount amount • Discount: The Discount indicates the discount applied or taken as a percentage. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Fixed: Fixed price for the price adjustment • Datefrom: The Date From indicates the starting date of a range. • Priority: The Priority indicates the importance of this request. product categorys and partners groups. products. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

• Prod Cat Selection: Defines the way Product Categories will be selected (including or excluding the taken ones) • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Qty From: Quantity From is the minimun amount that the offer will be applied from. • Qty To: Quantity to is the maximun amount to apply the offer. • Pricelist Selection: Defines the way Price Lists will be selected (including or excluding the taken ones)

20.7

M Offer PriceList

Used to select Price Lists for a price adjustment. • M Offer Pricelist ID: Price List selected into a Price Adjustment. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment • M Pricelist ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing, margin and cost of items purchased or sold.

20.8

M Offer BPartner

Used to select the business partners related to the Price Adjustment. • M Offer Bpartner ID: Selected Business Partner in a Price Adjustment • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment

163/461

• C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor, Customer, Employee or Salesperson

20.9

M Offer BP Group

Used to select the groups of business partners related to the price adjustment. • M Offer Bp Group ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment • C Bp Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners.

20.10

M Offer Prod Cat

Used to select the different categories of products related to the Price Adjustments. • M Offer Prod Cat ID: Product Category selected in a Price Adjustment • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. Product categories are used for pricing.

20.11

M Offer Product

Used to select the different products related to the Price Adjustment. • M Offer Product ID: Product selected in a Price Adjustment.

164/461

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.

20.12

C Discount

Defines applicable discounts to the defined prices. • C Discount ID: Discount applicable to prices. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Discount: The Discount indicates the discount applied or taken as a percentage. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.

20.13

C BPartner Discount

Defines the Business Partners the discount can be applied to. • C Bpartner Discount ID: A Business Partner who can be applied the discount to. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor, Customer, Employee or Salesperson

165/461

• C Discount ID: Discount applicable to prices. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • Cascade: Indicates if it is applied in an accumulative way or if it is applied to the base amount. • Iscustomer: The Customer checkbox indicates if this Business Partner is a customer. If it is select additional fields will display which further define this customer. • Isvendor: The Vendor checkbox indicates if this Business Partner is a Vendor. If it is selected, additional fields will display which further identify this vendor.

166/461

21

Tax

Tax Category is used to enter and maintain Tax Categories. Each product is associated with a tax category which facilitates reacting changing tax rates. Tax Rate defines the different taxes used for each tax category.

21.1

C TaxCategory

The Tax Category is used to define and maintain Tax Categories. Each Product is associated with a Tax Category. This facilitates adapting to changes in taxation. • C TaxCategory ID: The Tax Category provides a method of grouping similar taxes. For example, Sales Tax or Value Added Tax. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • CommodityCode: The Commodity Code indicates a code that is used in tax calculations • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value.

21.2

C TaxCategory Trl

Translation for Tax Categories • C TaxCategory ID: The Tax Category provides a method of grouping similar taxes. For example, Sales Tax or Value Added Tax. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.

167/461

168/461 Figure 21: Tax

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated.

21.3

C Tax

The Tax Rate Window defines the different taxes used for each tax category. • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • TaxIndicator: The Tax Indicator identifies the short name that will print on documents referencing this tax. • IsDocumentLevel: If the tax is calculated on document level, all lines with that tax rate are added before calculating the total tax for the document.Otherwise the tax is calculated per line and then added.Due to rounding, the tax amount can differ. • ValidFrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range • IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. • RequiresTaxCertificate: The Requires Tax Certificate indicates that a tax certificate is required for a Business Partner to be tax exempt.

169/461

• Rate: The Rate indicates the percentage to be multiplied by the source to arrive at the tax or exchange amount. • Parent Tax ID: The Parent Tax indicates a tax that is a reference for multiple taxes. This allows you to charge multiple taxes on a document by entering the Parent Tax • C Country ID: The Country defines a Country. Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document. • C Region ID: The Region identifies a unique Region for this Country. • To Country ID: The To Country indicates the receiving country on a document • To Region ID: The To Region indicates the receiving region on a document • C TaxCategory ID: The Tax Category provides a method of grouping similar taxes. For example, Sales Tax or Value Added Tax. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. • IsTaxExempt: If a business partner is exempt from tax, the exempt tax rate is used. For this, you need to set up a tax rate with a 0% rate and indicate that this is your tax exempt rate. This is required for tax reporting, so that you can track tax exempt transactions. • SOPOType: Sales Tax: charged when selling - examples: Sales Tax, Output VAT (payable)Purchase Tax: tax charged when purchasing - examples: Use Tax, Input VAT (receivable) • Isprinttax: Custom code. Deprecated • C Bp Taxcategory ID: Bussines Partner Tax Category is a category defined for apply default taxes for procurement transactions. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document.

170/461

• Cascade: Indicates if it is applied in an accumulative way or if it is applied to the base amount.

21.4

C Tax Trl

Translations for taxes. • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • TaxIndicator: The Tax Indicator identifies the short name that will print on documents referencing this tax.

21.5

C Tax Zone

Defines the zones where the tax is applicable. • C Tax Zone ID: The tax zone indicates the zone from and the zone to the tax applies. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line.

171/461

• From Country ID: The Country defines a Country. Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document. • TO Country ID: The To Country indicates the receiving country on a document • TO Region ID: The To Region indicates the receiving region on a document 172/461 . • From Region ID: The Region identifies a unique Region for this Country.

• IsEuro: The Euro Currency checkbox is used to indicate if this currency is the Euro Currency.1 C Currency The Currency defines any currency you will transact with or report in. • ISO Code: For details . • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You cannot share data between Clients.http://www. • IsEMUMember: The Emu Member checkbox is used to indicate if this currency is a member of the European Economic Union. or will enter the Economic Monetary Union. Conversion Rates is used to define the conversion rates that will be used when converting document amounts from one currency to another 22.htm • CurSymbol: The Currency Symbol defines the symbol that will print when this currency is used. • StdPrecision: The Standard Precision defines the number of decimal places that amounts will be rounded to for accounting transactions and documents. 173/461 . • EMUEntryDate: The EMU Entry Date defines the date that this currency entered.unece.22 Currency Currency defines any currency which will be used in documents or reporting.org/trade/rec/rec09en. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • CostingPrecision: The Costing Precision defines the number of decimal places that amounts will be rounded to when performing costing calculations.

174/461 Figure 22: Currency .

• C Conversion Rate ID: The Conversion Rate defines the rate (multiply or divide) to use when converting a source currency to an accounting currency. • CurSymbol: The Currency Symbol defines the symbol that will print when this currency is used.3 C Conversion Rate The Conversion Rate defines the rates to use when converting a source currency to an accounting or reporting currency.• EMURate: The EMU Rate defines the official rate to be used when converting from this currency to the Euro. 22. 175/461 . You cannot share data between Clients.2 C Currency Trl Translations for currencies • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • PricePrecision: Defines the number of decimal positions that the prices are displayed with. The Conversion Rates tab is used to define conversion rates to be used when converting document amounts from one currency to another. 22. They can also be effective for a defined range of dates. Conversion rates can be defined for multiple rate types.

one rate may be used for Spot conversions and a different rate for Revaluations. For example. This allows you to enter multiple rates for the same currency pair.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • MultiplyRate: To convert Source number to Target number. If you enter a Divide Rate. • ValidFrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range • ValidTo: The Valid To date indicates the last day of a date range • ConversionRateType: The Conversion Rate Type indicates the type of conversion rate. the Source is divided by the divide rate. 176/461 . the Source is multiplied by the multiply rate. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • C Currency ID To: The Currency To defines the target currency for this conversion rate. If the Multiply Rate is entered. the Multiply Rate will be automatically calculated. • DivideRate: To convert Source number to Target number. then the Divide Rate will be automatically calculated.

1 C DocType The Document Definition Tab defines the processing parameters and controls for the document. This field only appears when the Document Base Type is Sales Order. Multiple document types may share a single document base type.¡BR¿SO Sub Type of ¡b¿Standard Order¡/b¿ will generate just the ¡b¿Order¡/b¿ document when the order is processed. • DocSubTypeSO: The SO Sub Type indicates the type of sales order this document refers to. Each document type provides the basis for processing of each document and controls the printed name and document sequence used.23 Document type Document Type defines any document to be used in the system. The max length is 2000 characters. • C DocType ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. ¡BR¿SO Sub Type of ¡b¿Warehouse Order¡/b¿ will generate the ¡b¿Order¡/b¿ and ¡b¿Delivery Note¡/b¿. You cannot share data between Clients. The selection made here will determine which documents will be generated when an order is processed and which documents must be generated manually or in batches.¡BR¿SO Sub Type of ¡b¿Credit Order¡/b¿ will generate 177/461 . • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. ¡b¿Invoice¡/b¿ and ¡b¿Receipt¡/b¿ must be generated via other processes. ¡BR¿The ¡b¿Delivery Note¡/b¿. • DocBaseType: The Document Base Type identifies the base or starting point for a document. ¡BR¿ The ¡b¿Invoice¡/b¿ and ¡b¿Receipt¡/b¿ must be generated via other processes. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 23. • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. ¡BR¿The following outlines this process. • PrintName: The Label to be printed indicates the name that will be printed on a document or correspondence. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

178/461 Figure 23: Document type .

the ¡b¿Order¡/b¿. ¡BR¿ The ¡b¿Reciept¡/b¿ must be generated via other processes. • C DocTypeProforma ID: The Document Type for Invoice indicates the document type that will be used when an invoice is generated from this sales document. This field will display only when the base document type is Sales Order. This field will display only when the base document type is Sales Order and the Pro Forma Invoice checkbox is selected • C DocTypeShipment ID: The Document Type for Shipments indicates the document type that will be used when a shipment is generated from this sales document. • IsBatched: • IsBatchControlEnforced: 179/461 . This field is displayed only if the Approved checkbox has been selected • IsDocNoControlled: The Document Number Controlled checkbox indicates if this document type will have a sequence number. • C DocTypeInvoice ID: The Document Type for Invoice indicates the document type that will be used when an invoice is generated from this sales document.¡BR¿SO Sub Type of ¡b¿POS¡/b¿ (Point of Sale) will generate all document • HasProforma: The Pro Forma Invoice checkbox indicates if pro forma invoices can be generated from this sales document. • C Approval ID: The Approval indicates the type of approval. • DocNoSequence ID: The Document Sequence indicates the sequencing rule to use for this document type. • CreatePicklist: • IsApproved: The Approved checkbox indicates if this document requires approval before it can be processed. A pro forma invoice indicates the amount that will be due should an order be shipped. This field will display only when the base document type is Sales Order. ¡b¿Delivery Note¡/b¿ and ¡b¿Invoice¡/b¿.

• IsPrinted: The Printed checkbox indicates if this document or line will included when printing. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. • Ismaxtable: This field is associated with Isorgfiltered field. • DocumentCopies: The Document Copies indicates the number of copies of each document that will be generated.• IsBatchDocNoControlled: • BatchNoSequence ID: • GL Category ID: The General Ledger Category is an optional. • AD PrintFormat ID: The print format determines how data is rendered for print. A different document number for each organization. • IsTransferred: The transferred checkbox indicates if the transactions associated with this document should be transferred to the General Ledger. • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. Charges can include items like shipping. • DocumentNote: The Document Note is used for recording any additional information regarding this product. • Orgfiltered: Filters by organization. handling or bank charges. • HasCharges: The Charges checkbox indicates that charges can be added to this document. If Isorgfiltered=’Y’ Ismaxtable must be equal to ’Y’ This will calculate the correct document number of the organization. • C Doctype Reversed ID: 180/461 . user defined method of grouping journal lines. This is used to calculate the document number by document type.

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The max length is 2000 characters. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. You cannot share data between Clients. • C DocType ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 181/461 . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.23. • PrintName: The Label to be printed indicates the name that will be printed on a document or correspondence.2 C DocType Trl The Translation Tab defines a Document Type in an alternate language. • DocumentNote: The Document Note is used for recording any additional information regarding this product.

• Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. Marketing Channel defines the different channels used in Marketing Campaigns 24. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. You cannot share data between Clients. Marketing Campaign defines the start and end date for a campaign. • Help: The Help field contains a hint.g. 182/461 . • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.1 C Activity Defines tasks that are preformed and in Activity Based Costing. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. It also gives a running balance of the invoice amounts which referred to this campaign. C Order). • IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. the system automatically creates a numeric number. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. comment or help about the use of this item. Campaign and Channel Activity Based Costing defines the different activities for which you want to capture costs.24 Activity. If you leave the search key empty.

183/461 Figure 24: Activity. Campaign and Channel .

• C Channel ID: The Sales Channel identifies a channel (or method) of sales generation. Please note that you will not be able to create new entities in this window if you have not default set for all mandatory values! • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. • StartDate: The Start Date indicates the first or starting date of a range.2 C Campaign The Marketing Campaign defines the parameters for a Campaign. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You cannot share data between Clients. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. the system automatically creates a numeric number. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Costs: The Costs indicates the cost of a campaign in an Organizations accounting currency. These include a start and end date as well as the amount of any invoices that have been processed which reference this campaign. • EndDate: The End Date indicates the last date in this range.g. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. 184/461 . Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.24. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. If you leave the search key empty. C Order).

The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 185/461 . • C Channel ID: The Sales Channel identifies a channel (or method) of sales generation. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You cannot share data between Clients.24. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.3 C Channel The Marketing Channel Tab defines the different methods or processes through which customers are obtained.

ex-factory. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. FCA Free carrier (Franco Transportista) FAS (Free alongside ship) FOB (Free on Board) CFR (Cost & Freight) CIF (Cost. The Incoterm selected by the parties to the transaction will determine which party pays the cost of each segment of transport. Every international contract will also contain what is referred to as an Incoterm (international commercial term).25 Order Sale Order allows you to enter and modify Sales Orders. and who bears the risk of loss at any given point during a given international shipment. These terms include the price. ex-mill. When commercial traders enter into a contract for the purchase and sale of goods they are free to negotiate specific terms of their contract. You cannot share data between Clients.1 C Incoterms EXW Ex-works. This data is completed with defauly values in each type of order. When a Purchase Order has been entered you can generate a Shipment Document or Invoice from this Purchase Order Simple Sales Order is used to trigger orders with minimal data. Insurance & Freight) CPT (Carriage paid to) CIP (Carriage and Insurance Paid to) • C Incoterms ID: The ID identifies a unique Incoterm • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Purchase Order defines a purchase order for an organization. ex-warehouse. 25. • Requiresdescription: If description is required • Isdelivery: If it has to be delivered 186/461 . Incoterms also influence Customs valuation basis of imported merchandise. and characteristics of the goods. who is responsible for loading & unloading of goods. quantity.

187/461 Figure 25: Order .

• DocStatus: The Document Status indicates the status of a document at this time. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. This processing is initiated by selecting the appropriate Document Action. • C DocType ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules • C DocTypeTarget ID: You can convert document types (e. the system will generate a document number for you. If the document is not saved. The purchase orders and the sales orders. use the Document Action field • DocAction: You find the current status in the Document Status field. If you leave the field empty. • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. the field is empty if you create a new document.2 C Order Table where there are all the orders. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. You cannot share data between Clients.g. The conversion is then reflected in the current type.25.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). 188/461 . C Order). from Offer to Order or Invoice). If you want to change the document status. The options are listed in a popup • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record.g. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document.

• DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • IsCreditApproved: Credit Approved indicates if the credit approval was successful for Orders • IsDelivered: • IsInvoiced: Indicator if invoiced • IsPrinted: The Printed checkbox indicates if this document or line will included when printing. • DatePrinted: Indicates the Date that a document was printed. • IsSelected: • SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. • IsApproved: The Approved checkbox indicates if this document requires approval before it can be processed. • IsTransferred: The transferred checkbox indicates if the transactions associated with this document should be transferred to the General Ledger. Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. Employee or Salesperson 189/461 . • DatePromised: The Date Promised indicates the date. This can include Vendor. • DateOrdered: Indicates the Date an item was ordered. Customer.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. that an Order was promised for. if any.

when a line is complete or as the products become available. • InvoiceRule: The Invoice Rule defines how a Business Partner is invoiced and the frequency of invoicing. • IsDiscountPrinted: The Discount Printed Checkbox indicates if the discount will be printed on the document. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • PaymentRule: The Payment Rule indicates the method of invoice payment. • FreightAmt: The Freight Amount indicates the amount charged for Freight in the document currency. • C PaymentTerm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction. • DeliveryRule: The Delivery Rule indicates when an order should be delivered. will the order be picked up or shipped. A standard number can be defined in the Business Partner (Customer) window.• BillTo ID: The Bill/Invoice To indicates the address to use when remitting bills • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • POReference: The business partner order reference is the order reference for this specific transaction. • DeliveryViaRule: The Delivery Via indicates how the products should be delivered. • FreightCostRule: The Freight Cost Rule indicates the method used when charging for freight. Often Purchase Order numbers are given to print on Invoices for easier reference. For example should the order be delivered when the entire order is complete. 190/461 . For example.

Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. This is also known as the gross price. • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling. • PriorityRule: The Priority indicates the importance (high. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines 191/461 . Restocking) • ChargeAmt: The Charge Amount indicates the amount for an additional charge.• M Shipper ID: The Shipper is any entity which will provide shipping to or shipping from an Organization. medium. margin and cost of items purchased or sold. low) of this document • TotalLines: The Total amount displays the total of all lines in document currency • GrandTotal: The Grand Total displays the total amount including Tax and Freight in document currency • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. Shipping. • IsTaxIncluded: The Tax Included checkbox indicates if the prices include tax. Not implemented yet • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program.

• SendEMail: Send emails with document attached (e. that this record was entered or created via Self-Service or that the user can change it via the Self-Service functionality. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • CopyFrom: Copy record lines • DropShip BPartner ID: • DropShip Location ID: • DropShip User ID: • IsSelfService: Self-Service allows users to enter data or update their data. and inter-organization transactions. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. Invoice. The flag indicates. • Deliverynotes: Notes for the delivery • C Incoterms ID: The ID identifies a unique Incoterm • Incotermsdescription: Description of the incoterm • Generatetemplate: A button that copies the products that are defined as template in the business partner window 192/461 .) • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. with centralized services. etc.g. Delivery Note. • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination.

• DatePromised: The Date Promised indicates the date. if any. Customer. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. You cannot share data between Clients. This can include Vendor. Employee or Salesperson • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • DateOrdered: Indicates the Date an item was ordered.• Delivery Location ID: Location where the product will be delivered to 25. 193/461 . • DateDelivered: • DateInvoiced: The Date Invoice indicates the date printed on the invoice. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.3 C OrderLine The table defines the individual line items that comprise an Order • C OrderLine ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. that an Order was promised for. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document.

• QtyReserved: The Reserved Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that is currently reserved for other orders. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • PriceList: The List Price is the official List Price in the document currency.• M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. • M Shipper ID: The Shipper is any entity which will provide shipping to or shipping from an Organization. • PriceLimit: The Price Limit indicates the lowest price for a product stated in the Price List Currency. • QtyInvoiced: The Invoiced Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that have been invoiced. • LineNetAmt: Indicates the line net amount based on the quantity and the actual price. • DirectShip: Direct Shipment indicates if this line will ship direct from the vendor to the customer • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • QtyOrdered: The Ordered Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that was ordered. Any additional charges or freight are not included. 194/461 . • QtyDelivered: The Delivered Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been delivered. • PriceActual: The Actual or Unit Price indicates the Price for a product in source currency.

• Discount: The Discount indicates the discount applied or taken as a percentage. • FreightAmt: The Freight Amount indicates the amount charged for Freight in the document currency. • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling, Shipping, Restocking) • ChargeAmt: The Charge Amount indicates the amount for an additional charge. Not implemented yet • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. • Lot: The Lot Number indicates the specific lot that a product was part of. • SerNo: The Serial Number identifies a tracked, warranted product. It can only be used when the quantity is 1. • S ResourceAssignment ID: The ID identifies a unique record • Ref OrderLine ID: Reference of the Sales Order Line to the corresponding Purchase Order Line or vice versa. Not implemented yet • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • IsDescription: If a line is Description Only, e.g. Product Inventory is not corrected. No accounting transactions are created and the amount or totals are not included in the document. This for including descriptional detail lines, e.g. for an Work Order. • QuantityOrder: Product quantity in the order uom. • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product. • Lastpriceso: The last sales order price of the product with the business partner of the sales order Custom code. Deprecated • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment

195/461

• PriceStd: The Standard Price indicates the standard or normal price for a product on this price list

25.4

C OrderLine Offer

• C Orderline Offer ID: The ID identifies a unique offer for an order line • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • C OrderLine ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment • Priceoffer: Base price before apply the offer. • Amtoffer: Amount to be discounted by the offer.

25.5

C OrderTax

The table constains the tax amount for an Order based on the lines entered. • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.

196/461

• TaxBaseAmt: The Tax Base Amount indicates the base amount used for calculating the tax amount. • TaxAmt: The Tax Amount displays the total tax amount for a document. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document.

197/461

26

Purchase specific
Material requirements are needs of material previous to purchase order

26.1

M Requisition

Contains the requirements for the materials. This requirements have a date and it’s possible to assign a vendor • M Requisition ID: The ID identifies a unique requisition • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. If the document is not saved, the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined, the field is empty if you create a new document. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). If you leave the field empty, the system will generate a document number for you. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿, where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.g. C Order). • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor, Customer, Employee or Salesperson • M Pricelist ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing, margin and cost of items purchased or sold. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record

198/461

199/461 Figure 26: Purchase specific

26.2

M RequisitionLine

The table defines the individual line that comprise a requisition • M Requisitionline ID: Identifies each product required to purchase in a requisition • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Requisition ID: The ID identifies a unique requisition • Dateplanned: Refers to the due date in which payment must be done. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. • Pricestd: The Standard Price indicates the standard or normal price for a product on this price list • Pricelimit: The Price Limit indicates the lowest price for a product stated in the Price List Currency. • Pricelist: The List Price is the official List Price in the document currency. • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. • Linenetamt: Indicates the line net amount based on the quantity and the actual price. Any additional charges or freight are not included.

26.3

M MatchInv

This table contains all the matches between the material receipt lines and the invoice lines. It uses only for the purchase transactions. For each material receipt line we can have one or more invoice lines, so the sum of the invoice lines has to match with his material receipt line own. When everything matches it means the material receipt line is already invoiced 200/461

• M MatchInv ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • M InOutLine ID: The Shipment/Receipt Line indicates a unique line in a Shipment/Receipt document • C InvoiceLine ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • DateTrx: The Transaction Date indicates the date of the transaction. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines

26.4

M MatchPO

This table contains all the matches between the order lines and: 1. With the material receipt lines. For each order line we can have one or more materials receipt lines. The result of the sum of all the material receipt lines have to match with their own order line in order to be able to say that the order line has been already receipt. 2. With the invoice line. For each order line we can have one or more invoices lines. The result of the sum of all the invoices lines have to much with their own order line in order to be able to say that the order line has been already invoiced

• M MatchPO ID: The ID identifies a unique record

201/461

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • C OrderLine ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • M InOutLine ID: The Shipment/Receipt Line indicates a unique line in a Shipment/Receipt document • C InvoiceLine ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice. • DateTrx: The Transaction Date indicates the date of the transaction. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines

202/461

27

Transaction

Inventory Move allows to move inventory from one location or warehouse to another. Physical Inventory allows you to generate inventory count lists. Product defines all products used by an organization. These products include those sold to customers, used in the manufacture of products sold to customers and products purchased by an organization. Production defines those plan and inventory movements that occur when a product is created from a bill of materials and the work efforts of the manufacturing process. Shipment defines shipments made or to be made to a customer. Vendor Shipment defines the receipt of product or material from a Vendor. Warehouse and Locators Window defines each Warehouse, any Locators for that Warehouse and the Accounting parameters to be used for inventory in that Warehouse.

27.1

M InOut

Contains all the material transaction due to business partner shipments • M InOut ID: The Shipment / Receipt ID indicates the unique document for this shipment or receipt. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. If the document is not saved, the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined, the field is empty if you create a new document. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). If you leave the field empty, the system will generate a document number for you. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿, where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.g. C Order). • DocAction: You find the current status in the Document Status field. The options are listed in a popup • DocStatus: The Document Status indicates the status of a document at this time. If you want to change the document status, use the Document Action field

203/461

204/461 Figure 27: Transaction .

• C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. Employee or Salesperson • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • DateOrdered: Indicates the Date an item was ordered. etc) • MovementDate: The Movement Date indicates the date that a product moved in or out of inventory. This is the result of a shipment. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • C DocType ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. out. • IsPrinted: The Printed checkbox indicates if this document or line will included when printing. Customer. • MovementType: The Movement Type indicates the type of movement (in. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. to production. This can include Vendor.• Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. receipt or inventory movement. 205/461 .

• C Invoice ID: The Invoice ID uniquely identifies an Invoice Document. • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling. medium. For example. low) of this document • DatePrinted: Indicates the Date that a document was printed. • M Shipper ID: The Shipper is any entity which will provide shipping to or shipping from an Organization. • DeliveryViaRule: The Delivery Via indicates how the products should be delivered. • FreightAmt: The Freight Amount indicates the amount charged for Freight in the document currency. Shipping. • PriorityRule: The Priority indicates the importance (high. A standard number can be defined in the Business Partner (Customer) window. Often Purchase Order numbers are given to print on Invoices for easier reference. • GenerateTo: A button that creates documents 206/461 . will the order be picked up or shipped. • DeliveryRule: The Delivery Rule indicates when an order should be delivered.• POReference: The business partner order reference is the order reference for this specific transaction. Restocking) • ChargeAmt: The Charge Amount indicates the amount for an additional charge. • CreateFrom: The Create From process will create a new document based on information in an existing document selected by the user. • FreightCostRule: The Freight Cost Rule indicates the method used when charging for freight. when a line is complete or as the products become available. For example should the order be delivered when the entire order is complete.

Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region.• SendEMail: Send emails with document attached (e. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. etc.g. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign.) • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. and inter-organization transactions. 207/461 . • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. Delivery Note. • NoPackages: • PickDate: • ShipDate: Actual Date/Time of Shipment (pick up) • TrackingNo: • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). Invoice. with centralized services.

• C OrderLine ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. 208/461 . You cannot share data between Clients.• UpdateLines: Update attribute lines from shipment Custom code. • M InOut ID: The Shipment / Receipt ID indicates the unique document for this shipment or receipt. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. It uses for companies that rent locators or incoming materials that we don’t want to invoice • GenerateLines: A button that creates in out lines • Calculate Freight: Calculate freight cost • Delivery Location ID: Location where the product will be delivered to • M Freightcategory ID: Freight Categories are used to calculate the Freight for the Shipper selected 27. Deprecated • Islogistic: If is logistic it won’t be invoiced. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.2 M InOutLine The table defines the individual line that comprise shipment line • M InOutLine ID: The Shipment/Receipt Line indicates a unique line in a Shipment/Receipt document • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

Deprecated 27.• M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. No accounting transactions are created and the amount or totals are not included in the document. • SerNo: The Serial Number identifies a tracked.g. • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product. You cannot share data between Clients. warranted product.g. e. 209/461 . • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • MovementQty: The Movement Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been moved. • QuantityOrder: Product quantity in the order uom. for an Work Order. e.3 M Movement Contains all the material transactions due to movements between warehouses • M Movement ID: The Inventory Movement uniquely identifies a group of movement lines. It can only be used when the quantity is 1. Product Inventory is not corrected. • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • IsDescription: If a line is Description Only. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. This for including descriptional detail lines. • IsInvoiced: Indicator if invoiced • Lot: The Lot Number indicates the specific lot that a product was part of. • M Inoutline Type ID: The ID identifies a unique record Custom code.

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Move FromTo Locator: Move all the products there are in a locator to another 210/461 . • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. with centralized services. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). receipt or inventory movement. • MovementDate: The Movement Date indicates the date that a product moved in or out of inventory. This is the result of a shipment. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. and inter-organization transactions. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. You can then report based on a specific Campaign.

• MovementQty: The Movement Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been moved. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). • M LocatorTo ID: The Locator To indicates the location where the inventory is being moved to. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. • M Movement ID: The Inventory Movement uniquely identifies a group of movement lines. C Order).g. If the document is not saved. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. 27. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. the field is empty if you create a new document. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. If you leave the field empty. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. You cannot share data between Clients. the system will generate a document number for you. 211/461 . It will also control the display order of the lines within a document.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located.4 M MovementLine Contains the products and the quantities moved and the location it is moving from and to • M MovementLine ID: The Movement Line indicates the inventory movement document line (if applicable) for this transaction • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document.

You cannot share data between Clients. • QuantityOrder: Product quantity in the order uom.5 M Inventory Contains all the material transactions due to inventory • M Inventory ID: The Physical Inventory indicates a unique parameters for a physical inventory. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. This is the result of a shipment. 212/461 . receipt or inventory movement. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure 27. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • MovementDate: The Movement Date indicates the date that a product moved in or out of inventory. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed.• M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product.

The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. You cannot share data between Clients. 27. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign.• UpdateQty: Update the quantities that has been changed into the original quantities. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. This only can do it before you process the inventory • GenerateList: A button that generates a list to make an inventory of items • M PerpetualInv ID: The Perpetual Inventory identifies the Perpetual Inventory rule which generated this Physical Inventory. with centralized services. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination.6 M InventoryLine Contains the counts of the individual products in inventory • M InventoryLine ID: The Physical Inventory Line indicates the inventory document line (if applicable) for this transaction • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 213/461 . and inter-organization transactions.

• QuantityOrder: Product quantity in the order uom. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. 214/461 . It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • QuantityOrderBook: Quantity order book 27.7 M Internal Consumption Contains all the material transactions due to maintenance without a shipment • M Internal Consumption ID: Identifies an internal consumption of products. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. You cannot share data between Clients. • QtyBook: The Quantity Book indicates the line count stored in the system for a product in inventory • QtyCount: The Quantity Count indicates the actual inventory count taken for a product in inventory • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• M Inventory ID: The Physical Inventory indicates a unique parameters for a physical inventory.

27. • Movementqty: The Movement Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been moved.8 M Internal ConsumptionLine The table defines the individual product that comprise an internal consumption line • M Internal Consumptionline ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. 215/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • M Internal Consumption ID: Identifies an internal consumption of products. receipt or inventory movement. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. This is the result of a shipment. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Movementdate: The Movement Date indicates the date that a product moved in or out of inventory.

• IsCreated: Check to indicate that the records has been created and the production is ready to be processed. This is the result of a shipment. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • M Attributesetinstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • M Product Uom ID: Alternative order uom for the product. • MovementDate: The Movement Date indicates the date that a product moved in or out of inventory. receipt or inventory movement.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Quantityorder: Product quantity in the order uom. 216/461 . • C Uom ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure 27. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. You cannot share data between Clients.9 M Production Contains the header of the work effort • M Production ID: The Production uniquely identifies a Production Plan • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed.

The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. and inter-organization transactions. • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). • Issotrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. the system will generate a document number for you. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. C Order). • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • Endtime: End time in hours. 217/461 . with centralized services. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined.g. If the document is not saved. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. • Starttime: Start time in hours.• Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. If you leave the field empty. the field is empty if you create a new document.

• MA Wrphase ID: Indicates a Work Requirement Phase.10 M ProductionPlan Contains the items used and generated in a production • M ProductionPlan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Neededquantity: How many times it is necessary to complete a phase before closing it. 27. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • ProductionQty: The Production Quantity identifies the number of products to produce • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. Primary quantity = (secondary quantity)/(conversion rate) • MA Costcenteruse: Use of the cost center. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Production ID: The Production uniquely identifies a Production Plan • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 218/461 . • Conversionrate: It is the rate between primary unit and secondary unit.• Validating: Process to validate the work effort.

• Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • MA Costcenter Version ID: Identifies a cost center version valid during a time period. • Secondaryunit: Is an optional unit to define the number of times that is desired to perform the process. • Secondaryqty: Secondary quantity. • Realcost: Real Cost • Rejectedquantity: How many products have been rejected. You cannot share data between Clients. • Usedmaterial: Process to generate standards on production run. 219/461 . It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. work requirement phase or production run. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • Outsourced: Indicates that the correspondent process is being outsourced for the sequence. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.11 M ProductionLine Contains all the products that have been used or created in the production run and the quantities • M ProductionLine ID: The Production Line indicates the production document line (if applicable) for this transaction • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 27. • M ProductionPlan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product.

Custom code. So&nbsp.a negative productions refers to an input product. • Rejectedquantity: How many products have been rejected. • QuantityOrder: Product quantity in the order uom. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • PrintLabel: Process to print labels for the product. Deprecated 27. Deprecated • Calculated: Indicates that the record has been calculated. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.• MovementQty: The Movement Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been moved. A positive production means that is an output product. 220/461 . • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. • Productiontype: Indicates if the product is used in the sequence or is generated.12 M Transaction Contains all the material transactions for products that are defined as an item and stocked • M Transaction ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Secquality: Custom code. • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product. You cannot share data between Clients.

to production. out. You can issue Receipts. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.• MovementType: The Movement Type indicates the type of movement (in. • MovementQty: The Movement Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been moved. • MovementDate: The Movement Date indicates the date that a product moved in or out of inventory. etc) • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. receipt or inventory movement. • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product. • QuantityOrder: Product quantity in the order uom. This is the result of a shipment. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure 221/461 . • M InventoryLine ID: The Physical Inventory Line indicates the inventory document line (if applicable) for this transaction • M MovementLine ID: The Movement Line indicates the inventory movement document line (if applicable) for this transaction • M InOutLine ID: The Shipment/Receipt Line indicates a unique line in a Shipment/Receipt document • M ProductionLine ID: The Production Line indicates the production document line (if applicable) for this transaction • C ProjectIssue ID: Issues to the project initiated by the Issue to Project process. or Stock. Time and Expenses.

13 M Storage Detail Containts the current stock for every product • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • QtyOnHand: The On Hand Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that is on hand in a warehouse.27. • M Storage Detail ID: The ID identifies a unique record 222/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. • PreQtyOnHand: The quantity that we have already purchased but are not still in the warehouse • PreQtyOrderOnHand: The quantity that we have already purchased but are not still in the warehouse in the second uom • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • C Uom ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • M Product Uom ID: Alternative order uom for the product. • QtyOrderOnHand: The On Hand Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that is on hand in a warehouse in the second uom • DateLastInventory: The Date Last Inventory Count indicates the last time an Inventory count was done.

• M Attributesetinstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • C Uom ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • M Product Uom ID: Alternative order uom for the product. • QtyReserved: The Reserved Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that is currently reserved for other orders. • M Storage Pending ID: 223/461 .14 M Storage Pending Constains the reserved quantity and the ordered quantity • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. • QtyOrderOrdered: The Ordered Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that was ordered in the second uom • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.27. • QtyOrderReserved: The Reserved Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that is currently reserved for other orders in the second uom • QtyOrdered: The Ordered Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that was ordered. You cannot share data between Clients.

If you want to change the document status. the system will generate a document number for you. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. C Order). • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. the field is empty if you create a new document.1 C Invoice Contains all the invoices • C Invoice ID: The Invoice ID uniquely identifies an Invoice Document.28 Invoice Enter expense invoices from your vendors Expense invoice Maintain Payment Schedule of unpaid invoices Customer Invoice allows you to display and enter invoices for a customer. • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. 28. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. • DocStatus: The Document Status indicates the status of a document at this time. The options are listed in a popup • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿.g. 224/461 . If the document is not saved. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. Vendor Invoice allows you to display and enter Invoices from a Vendor. If you leave the field empty. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). use the Document Action field • DocAction: You find the current status in the Document Status field. You cannot share data between Clients.

225/461 Figure 28: Invoice .

The conversion is then reflected in the current type. Employee or Salesperson 226/461 . • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. • IsTransferred: The transferred checkbox indicates if the transactions associated with this document should be transferred to the General Ledger. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. • SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. • IsApproved: The Approved checkbox indicates if this document requires approval before it can be processed. • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.• Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • C DocType ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules • C DocTypeTarget ID: You can convert document types (e. This can include Vendor. • DatePrinted: Indicates the Date that a document was printed.g. Customer. • DateInvoiced: The Date Invoice indicates the date printed on the invoice. • IsPrinted: The Printed checkbox indicates if this document or line will included when printing. Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. from Offer to Order or Invoice). This processing is initiated by selecting the appropriate Document Action.

• IsTaxIncluded: The Tax Included checkbox indicates if the prices include tax. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • PaymentRule: The Payment Rule indicates the method of invoice payment. • IsDiscountPrinted: The Discount Printed Checkbox indicates if the discount will be printed on the document. Shipping. Often Purchase Order numbers are given to print on Invoices for easier reference. • DateOrdered: Indicates the Date an item was ordered. margin and cost of items purchased or sold. Not implemented yet 227/461 . • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling. This is also known as the gross price. A standard number can be defined in the Business Partner (Customer) window. Restocking) • ChargeAmt: The Charge Amount indicates the amount for an additional charge. • TotalLines: The Total amount displays the total of all lines in document currency • GrandTotal: The Grand Total displays the total amount including Tax and Freight in document currency • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing.• C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • POReference: The business partner order reference is the order reference for this specific transaction. • C PaymentTerm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction.

) • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • IsPaid: The document is paid • CreateFrom: The Create From process will create a new document based on information in an existing document selected by the user. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. • GenerateTo: A button that creates documents • SendEMail: Send emails with document attached (e. Invoice.g. Delivery Note. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. 228/461 . etc. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • CopyFrom: Copy record lines • IsSelfService: Self-Service allows users to enter data or update their data.• C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. and inter-organization transactions. • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. that this record was entered or created via Self-Service or that the user can change it via the Self-Service functionality. • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. with centralized services. The flag indicates.

• C Invoice ID: The Invoice ID uniquely identifies an Invoice Document. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • C Discount ID: Discount applicable to prices. 28. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. You cannot share data between Clients. • M InOutLine ID: The Shipment/Receipt Line indicates a unique line in a Shipment/Receipt document • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. You cannot share data between Clients.28. • C OrderLine ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. 229/461 .2 C Invoice Discount Contains the discounts apply to the whole invoice • C Invoice Discount ID: The ID identifies a unique discount for the invoice • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Invoice ID: The Invoice ID uniquely identifies an Invoice Document. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Cascade: Indicates if it is applied in an accumulative way or if it is applied to the base amount.3 C InvoiceLine Contains the individual items or charges on an Invoice • C InvoiceLine ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document.

• PriceList: The List Price is the official List Price in the document currency. Not implemented yet • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. especially that which could be converted to cash. • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling. • LineNetAmt: Indicates the line net amount based on the quantity and the actual price. • S ResourceAssignment ID: The ID identifies a unique record • A Asset ID: Any item of economic value owned by the corporation. Shipping. Restocking) • ChargeAmt: The Charge Amount indicates the amount for an additional charge. 230/461 . • PriceLimit: The Price Limit indicates the lowest price for a product stated in the Price List Currency. • TaxAmt: The Tax Amount displays the total tax amount for a document. Any additional charges or freight are not included. • QtyInvoiced: The Invoiced Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that have been invoiced. • PriceActual: The Actual or Unit Price indicates the Price for a product in source currency.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

• M Offer ID: Price Adjustment 231/461 . • QuantityOrder: Product quantity in the order uom.g. • M Offer ID: Price Adjustment • PriceStd: The Standard Price indicates the standard or normal price for a product on this price list 28. • C Invoiceline ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice. for an Work Order. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document.• M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • IsDescription: If a line is Description Only. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • C Invoice Discount ID: The ID identifies a unique discount for the invoice • C Projectline ID: The Project Line indicates a unique project line.4 C InvoiceLine Offer Contains all the offers applies to an invoice line. e.g. • C Invoiceline Offer ID: Offers applied to the invoice line. You cannot share data between Clients. No accounting transactions are created and the amount or totals are not included in the document. e. This for including descriptional detail lines. Product Inventory is not corrected. • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product.

28.• Priceoffer: Base price before apply the offer. • Amt: Amount • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Invoice ID: The Invoice ID uniquely identifies an Invoice Document.5 C InvoiceLine AcctDimension Accounting dimension • C Invoiceline Acctdimension ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign.6 C InvoiceTax Contains the total tax due based on the Invoice Lines • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • Amtoffer: Amount to be discounted by the offer. • C Invoiceline ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice. • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. 232/461 . 28.

233/461 . It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. You cannot share data between Clients. • TaxAmt: The Tax Amount displays the total tax amount for a document.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • TaxBaseAmt: The Tax Base Amount indicates the base amount used for calculating the tax amount.

• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.29 Commission Define how and when you want the commissions to be calculated and to whom to pay it. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. Employee or Salesperson • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • FrequencyType: The frequency type is used for calculating the date of the next event. For each period. • C Commission ID: The Commission ID is a unique identifier of a set of commission rules. Commission Run displays the results of processing commissions. Customer. You cannot share data between Clients. • DocBasisType: The Calculation Basis indicates the basis to be used for the commission calculation. Commissions defines how commissions and royalties will be paid. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • DateLastRun: The Date Last Run indicates the last time that a process was run. • ListDetails: The List Details checkbox indicates that the details for each document line will be displayed. 234/461 .1 C Commission Contains all the commissions and when to pay a commission to whom. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. you start the calculation of the commission after the transaction for that period are completed or closed. This can include Vendor. 29.

235/461 Figure 29: Commission .

• M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. all transactions for the period will be used to calculate the commission.• CreateFrom: The Create From process will create a new document based on information in an existing document selected by the user. • C CommissionLine ID: The Commission Line is a unique instance of a Commission Run. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Commission ID: The Commission ID is a unique identifier of a set of commission rules. 236/461 . It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. If you do not enter restricting parameters (e. • AmtMultiplier: The Multiplier Amount indicates the amount to multiply the total amount generated by this commission run by.2 C CommissionLine Define the selection criteria for paying the commission. 29.g. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. for specific Business Partner (Groups) or Product (Categories). etc. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. If the commission run was done in detail mode then each document that was included in the run will have its own commission line. If the commission run was done in summary mode then there will be a single line representing the selected documents totals. • AmtSubtract: The Subtract Amount indicates the amount to subtract from the total amount prior to multiplication.

• M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. Employee or Salesperson • C SalesRegion ID: The Sales Region indicates a specific area of sales coverage. • CommissionOrders: Sales Reps are entered in Orders and Invoices. only Orders and Invoices for this Sales Reps are included in the calculation of the commission. • IsPositiveOnly: The Positive Only check box indicates that if the result of the subtraction is negative. Product categories are used for pricing. 237/461 . This would mean that negative commissions would not be generated. the Commission Run ID will display. This can include Vendor. • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to.examples are store. • Org ID: An organization is a unit of your client or legal entity . 29. When a Commission is processed on the Commission Screen.3 C CommissionRun Contains all the commission run for a period • C CommissionRun ID: The Commission Run is a unique system defined identifier of a specific run of commission. Customer. • C BP Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners. If selected.• QtySubtract: The Quantity Subtract identifies the quantity to be subtracted before multiplication • QtyMultiplier: The Multiplier Quantity field indicates the amount to multiply the quantities accumulated for this commission run. department. it is ignored. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.

the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice).g. You cannot share data between Clients. 238/461 . • C Commission ID: The Commission ID is a unique identifier of a set of commission rules.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. If you leave the field empty. You cannot share data between Clients. the system will generate a document number for you. If the document is not saved. 29.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • StartDate: The Start Date indicates the first or starting date of a range. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • GrandTotal: The Grand Total displays the total amount including Tax and Freight in document currency • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record.4 C CommissionAmt Contains all the commission lines amounts • C CommissionAmt ID: The Commission Amount indicates the resulting amount from a Commission Run. • C Invoice ID: The Invoice ID uniquely identifies an Invoice Document. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. the field is empty if you create a new document. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. C Order).

• ConvertedAmt: The Converted Amount is the result of multiplying the Source Amount by the Conversion Rate for this target currency. • C OrderLine ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. 29. • C CommissionAmt ID: The Commission Amount indicates the resulting amount from a Commission Run. Each document line that was part of the Commission Run will be reflected here. It is based on the parameters as defined for this Commission Run. but the suggested way is to add new correcting lines. When a Commission is processed on the Commission Screen. If the commission run was done in detail mode then each document that was included in the run will have its own commission line. • C CommissionLine ID: The Commission Line is a unique instance of a Commission Run. the Commission Run ID will display. 239/461 .• C CommissionRun ID: The Commission Run is a unique system defined identifier of a specific run of commission. • CommissionAmt: The Commission Amount is the total calculated commission. You cannot share data between Clients. • Reference: The Reference displays the source document number. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.5 C CommissionDetail You may alter the amount and quantity of the detail records. If the commission run was done in summary mode then there will be a single line representing the selected documents totals.The amounts are converted from the transaction currency to the Commission Currency (defined in the Commission window) • C CommissionDetail ID: The Commission Detail provides supporting information on a Commission Run. • ActualQty: The Actual Quantity indicates the quantity as referenced on a document.

• C InvoiceLine ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice. • Info: The Information displays data from the source document line. 240/461 . • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • ActualAmt: Actual amount indicates the agreed upon amount for a document. • ActualQty: The Actual Quantity indicates the quantity as referenced on a document. • ConvertedAmt: The Converted Amount is the result of multiplying the Source Amount by the Conversion Rate for this target currency.

You cannot share data between Clients. • Include Product Category: If it is checked the selected categories will be included else they will be excluded. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 241/461 . • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Rappels defined the different rappels when a client reaches a certain sales volume. otherwise the maximun applicable discount will be applied to every amount. 30. vendors and employees. This includes customers. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • Include Product: If it is checked the selected products will be included else they will be excluded.30 Rappel Business Partner allows to define any party with whom you transact. • Scaled: If rappel is scaled each scale of amount will have a different discount.1 M Rappel Contains all the configuration rappels • M Rappel ID: The ID identifies a unique rappel • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Each rappel is managed through different product categories and is applicable to partners that have been included.

242/461 Figure 30: Rappel .

Employee or Salesperson • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction.3 M Rappel Product Contains the discount configuration for the product • M Rappel Product ID: The ID identifies a unique product for the rappel • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.2 M Rappel Bpartner Contains all the configuration rappels.30. This can include Vendor. Customer. • ValidFrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range • ValidTo: The Valid To date indicates the last day of a date range • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • GenerateInvoice: A button that generates all the invoices as a result of the activity of the business partner during a period of time 30. • M Rappel ID: The ID identifies a unique rappel • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. You cannot share data between Clients. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Rappel Bpartner ID: The ID identifies a unique rappel for the partner • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • M Rappel ID: The ID identifies a unique rappel 243/461 . This rappel only applies to business partners recorded on this tab.

• M Rappel ID: The ID identifies a unique rappel • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to.• M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. 30. 30.4 M Rappel Productcategory Contains the discount configuration for the product category • M Rappel Productcategory ID: The ID identifies a unique product category for the rappel • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Discount: The Discount indicates the discount applied or taken as a percentage. • M Rappel ID: The ID identifies a unique rappel • Discount: The Discount indicates the discount applied or taken as a percentage. • Amnt To: The maximun amount the discount is applied to. Product categories are used for pricing. You cannot share data between Clients. • Amnt From: The minumun amount the discount is applied to. You cannot share data between Clients. 244/461 .5 M Rappel Scale Defines the scales where the discounts will be applied • M Rappel Scale ID: The ID identifies a unique scale for the rappel • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

6 M Rappel Invoice Contains all the invoices generated due to rappels conditions • M Rappel Invoice ID: The ID identifies a unique rappel for the invoice • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.30. You cannot share data between Clients. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records 245/461 . • M Rappel Bpartner ID: The ID identifies a unique rappel for the partner • C Invoice ID: The Invoice ID uniquely identifies an Invoice Document.

e. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You cannot share data between Clients. for Service/Charge projectsWork Order . • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • C ProjectType ID: Type of the project with optional phases of the project with standard performance information • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.g. • ProjectCategory: The Project Category determines the behavior of the project:General .no special accounting.2 C Phase Standard Phase of the project with performance information • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.creates Project/Job WIP transactions .g. for Presales or general trackingService . • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records 246/461 .31 Project Maintain Project Types and their Phases with standard performance information Project is used to define the projects which will be tracked via documents. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Budget Project is used to manage civil works engineering projects where request for proposals are made and assigned to winning vendors.1 C ProjectType Contains the differents types of a project.no special accounting. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 31.abili 31. comment or help about the use of this item. e.

247/461 Figure 31: Project .

You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. comment or help about the use of this item. • C ProjectType ID: Type of the project with optional phases of the project with standard performance information • StandardQty: • C Phase ID: Phase of the project with standard performance information with standard work • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. comment or help about the use of this item. 248/461 . • Help: The Help field contains a hint.3 C Task Standard Project Task • C Task ID: Standard Project Task in a Project Phase with standard effort • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 31. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

• AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system.4 C Project Contains the Value. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. . The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. You cannot share data between Clients. C Order). Name and Description for each project. If you leave the search key empty. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. This tab is used in order to introduce information regarding a project: Address. committed to and used for this project. • Note: The Note field allows for optional entry of user defined information regarding this record • IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node.g. . • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. status. .• C Phase ID: Phase of the project with standard performance information with standard work • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. the system automatically creates a numeric number. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact 249/461 . where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. It also is defines the tracks the amounts assigned to. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • StandardQty: 31.

Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. You would use the planned amount for your realistic estimation. • IsCommitment: Commitment indicates if the document is legally binding. • PlannedAmt: The Planned Amount indicates the anticipated amount for this project or project line. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • M PriceList Version ID: Each Price List can have multiple versions. Employee or Salesperson • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • POReference: The business partner order reference is the order reference for this specific transaction. A standard number can be defined in the Business Partner (Customer) window. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. This can include Vendor. • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. 250/461 .• C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • PlannedQty: The Planned Quantity indicates the anticipated quantity for this project or project line • PlannedMarginAmt: The Planned Margin Amount indicates the anticipated margin amount for this project or project line. Often Purchase Order numbers are given to print on Invoices for easier reference. The most common use is to indicate the dates that a Price List is valid for. • CommittedAmt: The commitment amount is independent from the planned amount. • C PaymentTerm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction. Customer. which might be higher or lower than the commitment amount.

• SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. The contract date is used in reports and report parameters. Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. Ignored.• DateContract: The contract date is used to determine when the document becomes effective. if the amount or quantity is zero. 251/461 . • DateFinish: The finish date is used to indicate when the project is expected to be completed or has been completed. • InvoicedAmt: The amount invoiced • InvoicedQty: The Quantity Invoiced • ProjectBalanceAmt: The project balance is the sum of all invoices and payments • C Phase ID: Phase of the project with standard performance information with standard work • IsCommitCeiling: The commitment amount and quantity is the maximum amount and quantity to be charged. • CopyFrom: Copy record lines • C ProjectType ID: Type of the project with optional phases of the project with standard performance information • CommittedQty: The commitment amount is independent from the planned amount. • GenerateTo: A button that creates documents • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. which might be higher or lower than the commitment amount. This is usually the contract date. • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. You would use the planned amount for your realistic estimation.

• ProjectCategory: The Project Category determines the behavior of the project:General .¡BR¿Lost: The project has been won by a partner who has not been sent the budgetal or our budget has not been selected.there can be 5 the status of the project:¡BR¿Open: The budget is sent. e. • Invoice ToProject: This option indicates if the invoices has been sent to the winner are Origen invoices 252/461 . for Service/Charge projectsWork Order . • C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity. e. Usually&nbsp.abili • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record.g. • PaymentRule: The Payment Rule indicates the method of invoice payment.no special accounting. This are the most tipical intiatives • Projectstatus: ¡P¿Indicates the current status of the project.¡/P¿ • ChangeProjectStatus: This process changes the status of this projecto. margin and cost of items purchased or sold. The project has already not been won. for Presales or general trackingService .creates Project/Job WIP transactions .¡BR¿No following up: No follow up the project¡BR¿Order: The project has been won by a partner we have sent a budget¡BR¿Order closed: All the products have been delivered • Projectkind: Indicates the kind of work • BillTo ID: The Bill/Invoice To indicates the address to use when remitting bills • Projectphase: Different phases for a project • GenerateOrder: ¡P¿This process lets you to generate a purchase order to this project.no special accounting. • Publicprivate: A public o private enterprise. • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing.g.

You cannot share data between Clients.5 C ProjectPhase Actual Phase of the Project with Status information .• PlannedPOAmt: Planned amount for the purchase order • LastPlannedProposalDate: Last day of following up the budget for the project • Document Copies: Number of copies • Accountno: The Account Number indicates the Number assigned to this account • Responsible ID: An employee that is the responsible of the project. • Servrevenue: Revenue services • Servcost: Service cost • Servmargin: Service margin • Expreinvoicing: Reinvoicing Expenses • Expexpenses: Expected expenses • Expmargin: Expected margin • Setprojecttype: Set Project Type and for Service Projects copy Phases and Tasks of Project Type into Project 31.generated from Phase of Project Type. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 253/461 .

• IsComplete: Indication that this is complete • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • GenerateOrder: ¡P¿This process lets you to generate a purchase order to this project. You would use the planned amount for your realistic estimation. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • StartDate: The Start Date indicates the first or starting date of a range. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. • C Phase ID: Phase of the project with standard performance information with standard work • C ProjectPhase ID: The ID identifies a unique phase for the project • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • EndDate: The End Date indicates the last date in this range. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • CommittedAmt: The commitment amount is independent from the planned amount. • PriceActual: The Actual or Unit Price indicates the Price for a product in source currency. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. comment or help about the use of this item. 254/461 . which might be higher or lower than the commitment amount.¡/P¿ • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order.

31. • C ProjectPhase ID: The ID identifies a unique phase for the project • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document.7 C ProjectLine Contians the lines (products and/or services) associated with the Project • C ProjectLine ID: The Project Line indicates a unique project line. You cannot share data between Clients. 255/461 . if the amount or quantity is zero. Ignored. comment or help about the use of this item. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.6 C ProjectTask A Project Task in a Project Phase represents the actual work. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • C ProjectTask ID: A Project Task in a Project Phase represents the actual work. • C Task ID: Standard Project Task in a Project Phase with standard effort • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• IsCommitCeiling: The commitment amount and quantity is the maximum amount and quantity to be charged. 31. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.

You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Product categories are used for pricing. You would use the planned amount for your realistic estimation. • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. You would use the planned amount for your realistic estimation. • PlannedAmt: The Planned Amount indicates the anticipated amount for this project or project line. • PlannedMarginAmt: The Planned Margin Amount indicates the anticipated margin amount for this project or project line. which might be higher or lower than the commitment amount. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. 256/461 . • PlannedQty: The Planned Quantity indicates the anticipated quantity for this project or project line • PlannedPrice: The Planned Price indicates the anticipated price for this project line. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • CommittedAmt: The commitment amount is independent from the planned amount. which might be higher or lower than the commitment amount. • InvoicedAmt: The amount invoiced • InvoicedQty: The Quantity Invoiced • CommittedQty: The commitment amount is independent from the planned amount. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.

• Product Value: • Product Name: Name of the product • Product Description: Description for the product 31. You cannot share data between Clients. • DoPricing: • Plannedpoprice: Indicates the planned price for the purchase order • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project 257/461 . Time and Expenses. You can issue Receipts.• C ProjectIssue ID: Issues to the project initiated by the Issue to Project process.8 C Project Vendor Contians all the vendors which have participated in the budgetting of a certain project • C Project Vendor ID: The ID identifies a unique vendor for the project • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C OrderPO ID: Purchase order • IsPrinted: The Printed checkbox indicates if this document or line will included when printing. or Stock. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed.

You cannot share data between Clients. This can include Vendor. Employee or Salesperson • Datesend: The date of the proposal was sent • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner 258/461 . • C Incoterms ID: The ID identifies a unique Incoterm • Incoterms Description: • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing. margin and cost of items purchased or sold. This can include Vendor. The most common use is to indicate the dates that a Price List is valid for. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.• C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. Customer. Employee or Salesperson • Note: The Note field allows for optional entry of user defined information regarding this record • M PriceList Version ID: Each Price List can have multiple versions.¡/P¿ 31. • GenerateOrder: ¡P¿This process lets you to generate a purchase order to this project. Customer.9 C ProjectProposal Contains the budgets assigned to business partners and a project • C Projectproposal ID: The ID identifies a unique proposal for the project • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

• AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system.. . . • C Projectproposal ID: The ID identifies a unique proposal for the project • Lineno: Number of the line 259/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. • Projectwon: Award contract to project • Paymentrule: The Payment Rule indicates the method of invoice payment. • C Paymentterm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction.10 C ProjectProposalLine Contains all budgetted products to a Business Partner detailing information such as quantity. • C Projectproposalline ID: The ID identifies a unique line proposal for the project • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • CopyFrom: Copy record lines • HeaderNote: Using this field you can write a text that will show on the header of the document when you print it • FootNote: Using this field you can write a text that will show on the foot of the document when you print it • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. 31. price.

• Product Value: • Product Name: Name of the product • Product Description: Description for the product 31.• M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document.11 C ProjectProposalTask Contains all the tasks that comprise a proposal • C Projectproposaltask ID: The ID identifies a unique task for the proposal of the project • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Projectproposal ID: The ID identifies a unique proposal for the project • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. • Price: The Price indicates the Price for a product or service. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • Note: The Note field allows for optional entry of user defined information regarding this record 260/461 . • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You cannot share data between Clients.

billable time and to claim expenses. If you leave the search key empty. The time and expense report allows you to capture time spent on a project.1 S ExpenseType Contains all the expsenses types for reporting purpose • S ExpenseType ID: Expense report type • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.32 Services Time type maintains different types of time for reporting. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients. For example. C Order).g. the system automatically creates a numeric number. • C TaxCategory ID: The Tax Category provides a method of grouping similar taxes. 261/461 . • IsInvoiced: Indicator if invoiced • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. Product categories are used for pricing. 32. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. Sales Tax or Value Added Tax. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.

262/461 Figure 32: Services .

where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. If the document is not saved. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. comment or help about the use of this item. You cannot share data between Clients.g. the system will generate a document number for you.32. the field is empty if you create a new document. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). If you leave the field empty. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.2 S TimeType Contains all the time types for reporting purposes (In parallel to Activities) • S TimeType ID: Differentiate time types for reporting purposes (In parallel to Activities) • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. You cannot share data between Clients. Customer. C Order). • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿.3 S TimeExpense Contains the time and expenses for the Employee or Contractor (Business Partner) • S TimeExpense ID: The ID identifies a unique record for the expense report • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 32. Employee or Salesperson 263/461 . This can include Vendor.

• DateReport: Date of Expense/Time Report • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • S TimeExpense ID: The ID identifies a unique record for the expense report • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • IsTimeReport: The line contains only time information • DateExpense: Date of expense • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • ExpenseAmt: Expense amount in currency 264/461 . It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. You cannot share data between Clients. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document.4 S TimeExpenseLine Contains all the expense items and billable or non-billable hours • S TimeExpenseLine ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • IsApproved: The Approved checkbox indicates if this document requires approval before it can be processed. 32.

265/461 . • InvoicePrice: Unit Price in the currency of the business partner! If it is 0. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. Customer. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. Employee or Salesperson • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. the standard price of the sales price list of the business partner (customer) is used. This can include Vendor. • Note: The Note field allows for optional entry of user defined information regarding this record • IsInvoiced: Indicator if invoiced • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • C OrderLine ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order.• C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • ConvertedAmt: The Converted Amount is the result of multiplying the Source Amount by the Conversion Rate for this target currency. • C InvoiceLine ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice. • S ResourceAssignment ID: The ID identifies a unique record • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

• C ProjectPhase ID: The ID identifies a unique phase for the project • C ProjectTask ID: A Project Task in a Project Phase represents the actual work. • S TimeType ID: Differentiate time types for reporting purposes (In parallel to Activities) 266/461 .

Vendor Invoice allows you to display and enter Invoices from a Vendor. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. You cannot share data between Clients. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. If you leave the field empty.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. once the goods have been shipped to the customer. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document.1 C Settlement Termination of a business operation by using its assets to discharge its liabilities. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.33 Payment management Remitance Type defines the types of remittances defining its status. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 33. • DateTrx: The Transaction Date indicates the date of the transaction. payment rule and paramters Customer Invoice allows you to display and enter invoices for a customer. meaning that are not coming from an invoice. Only Generated and Cancelled settlements are chown here.g. C Order). the field is empty if you create a new document. the merchant can key a transaction for settlement at which time the customer’s credit card is charged for the transaction and the proceeds are deposited into the merchant account. Settlement manual allows users to create settlements that are not automatically generated by the system. Purchase Order Window defines a purchase order for an organization. the system will generate a document number for you. • C Settlement ID: Termination of a business operation by using its assets to discharge its liabilities. Settlement is used to manage settlements. Sales Order Window allows you to enter and modify Sales Orders. For example. • C DocType ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules 267/461 . If the document is not saved.

268/461 Figure 33: Payment management .

• Chargedamt: Indicates the total amount of the payments that have been canceled and charged. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. • Generatedamt: Indicates the total amount of the payments that have been generated in this settlement. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination.• Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • CreateFrom: The Create From process will create a new document based on information in an existing document selected by the user. 269/461 . • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • Cancelednotchargeamt: Indicates the amount that has been canceled but has generated no charges in the bank account or cash. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. You can then report based on a specific Campaign.

• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 270/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. • CreateFile: Create file • Dateacct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • Settlementtype: Indicates the type of settlement (settlement or manual settlement) • SettlementOpen: Not implemented yet • Copyfrom: Copy record lines • IsTemplate: Template is checked when the element is used as a template. • IsReceipt: This is a sales transaction (receipt) • C Settlement Cancel ID: Refers to the settlement in which this Debt/Payment has been cancelled. • C Invoice ID: The Invoice ID uniquely identifies an Invoice Document. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • C Debt Payment ID: Refers to the amount of money to be paid or collected.2 C Debt Payment Refers to the amount of money to be paid or collected. • C Settlement Generate ID: Refers to the settlement in which this Debt/Payment has been generated. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 33.

• C CashBook ID: The Cash Book identifies a unique cash book. • IsManual: The Manual check box indicates if the process will done manually. • Changesettlementcancel: • Cancel Processed: The settlement cancel is processed. • WriteOffAmt: The Write Off Amount indicates the amount to be written off as uncollectible. The cash book is used to record cash transactions. Charge) for the defined time period at this Bank. • Dateplanned: Refers to the due date in which payment must be done. • IsValid: The element passed the validation check • C BankStatementLine ID: The Bank Statement Line identifies a unique transaction (Payment. Customer. Employee or Salesperson • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • C CashLine ID: The Cash Journal Line indicates a unique line in a cash journal. This can include Vendor.• C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. 271/461 . • C BankAccount ID: The Bank Account identifies an account at this Bank. Withdrawal. • PaymentRule: The Payment Rule indicates the method of invoice payment. • IsPaid: The document is paid • Amount: The Amount indicates the amount for this document line.

• GLItemAmt: • Isdirectposting: Direct Posting • C Glitem ID: General ledger item. 272/461 . • Status Initial: Status of a debt/payment when it is created.3 C Glitem • C Glitem ID: General ledger item. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 33. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Status: Current status of a debt/payment. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • IsAutomaticGenerated: It is automatically generated. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.• Generate Processed: The settlement generate is processed. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. You cannot share data between Clients.

4 C Debt Payment Balancing GL items used to configure the accounting entry related to this debt/payment creation. • Amountdebit: Debit amount • Amountcredit: Credit amount • C Glitem ID: General ledger item. You cannot share data between Clients. 33. You cannot share data between Clients. • Amountdebit: Debit amount • Amountcredit: Credit amount • C Glitem ID: General ledger item. • C Debt Payment ID: Refers to the amount of money to be paid or collected. 273/461 .33. • C Debt Payment Bal Replace ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Debt Payment Balancing ID: GL items used to configure the accounting entry related to this debt/payment creation. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Debt Payment ID: Refers to the amount of money to be paid or collected.5 C Debt Payment Bal Replace GL items used to replace existing ones when the settlement is already processed but not posted. • Replacing: Replacing process.

6 C DP Management Document in which status of a debt/payment can be modified. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing 274/461 . • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • C Dp Management ID: Debt Payment Management allows to manage the changes of status of a debt/payment. If the document is not saved. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. • C Doctype ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined.33. the system will generate a document number for you. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document.g. • Datetrx: The Transaction Date indicates the date of the transaction. If you leave the field empty. C Order). Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). You cannot share data between Clients. the field is empty if you create a new document.

275/461 . • C Debt Payment ID: Refers to the amount of money to be paid or collected. • C Dp Managementline ID: Indicates the status change of a Debt Payment. • Status To: Is the status that debt payment has taken. • Status From: Initial status of the debt payment. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Dateacct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record 33.7 C DP ManagementLine Indicates the status change of a Debt Payment.• User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • CreateFrom: The Create From process will create a new document based on information in an existing document selected by the user. You cannot share data between Clients. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • C Dp Management ID: Debt Payment Management allows to manage the changes of status of a debt/payment. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.• Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. You cannot share data between Clients. 276/461 . • C Remittance Type ID: The remittance type defines the properties the remittance has. 33. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.8 C Remittance Parameter Refers to the parameters needed to make a remittance. • Consolidate: When a remittance type is consolidated it will be created a cancel settlement from the debt/payments in the remittance and another one with the amount being the sum of all debt/payments. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Content: Content • C Remittance Type ID: The remittance type defines the properties the remittance has.9 C Remittance Type Definition of types of remittances. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • C Remittance Parameter ID: Refers to the parameters needed to make a remittance. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 33. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document.

The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Datetrx: The Transaction Date indicates the date of the transaction. • C Remittance ID: Refers to a group of payments sent to the bank. 33. • Status Returned: The returned status is the status that will be taken by the debt/payment when it is returned. • Paymentruleconsolidated: Is the payment rule that will be applied for the consolidated debt/payments. • C Bankaccount ID: The Bank Account identifies an account at this Bank. • C Dp Management ID: Debt Payment Management allows to manage the changes of status of a debt/payment. • CreateFrom: The Create From process will create a new document based on information in an existing document selected by the user. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Remittance Type ID: The remittance type defines the properties the remittance has.• Status To: Is the status that debt payment has taken. You cannot share data between Clients. 277/461 .10 C Remittance Refers to a group of payments sent to the bank. • C Settlement ID: Termination of a business operation by using its assets to discharge its liabilities. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.

278/461 . The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. C Order). It takes the different parameters (including the docuemnt type) from the remittance type. • C Remittance ID: Refers to a group of payments sent to the bank. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document.g. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. • Duedate: Date when the payment is due without deductions or discount • Getfile: Creates a File for the ebank. • C Debt Payment Cancelled: Generated debt payment that will cancel remittance line payment. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.• DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. You cannot share data between Clients. If you leave the field empty. • C Debt Payment ID: Refers to the amount of money to be paid or collected.11 C RemittanceLine Refers to a payment sent to the bank. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). the field is empty if you create a new document. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. 33. If the document is not saved. • C Remittanceline ID: Refers to a group of payments sent to the bank. the system will generate a document number for you.

279/461 .• Returned: If it is checked means that the debt/payment has been returned by the bank.

34. It is used in routing checks and electronic transactions. Not implemented yet • C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 280/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. Address. Each Bank is given an identifying Name. Bank is used to define the banks and accounts associated with an organization or business partner Cash Journal is used to record disbursements from and receipts to Petty Cash Cashbook defines the bank and account against which cash transactions will be processed.34 Bank and Cash management It is necessary a Promissory format to print any Promissory Note with each Bank. These can include Bank Charges. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Vendor Charges and Handling Charges. • RoutingNo: The Bank Routing Number (ABA Number) identifies a legal Bank. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Process Bank Statements allows you to reconcile your Bank Statements. Routing No and Swift Code • C Bank ID: The Bank is a unique identifier of a Bank for this Organization or for a Business Partner with whom this Organization transacts. • SwiftCode: The SWIFT code is an identifier of a Bank Not implemented yet • IsOwnBank: The Own Bank field indicates if this bank is for this Organization as opposed to a Bank for a Business Partner.1 C Bank Defines a bank that is used by an organization or business partner. Not implemented yet • Codebank: First four numbers of the bank account number which identifies the bank uniquely. Charges defines the different charges that may be incurred.

281/461 Figure 34: Bank and Cash management .

• CreditLimit: The Credit Limit field indicates the credit limit for this account. You cannot share data between Clients. • C BankAccount ID: The Bank Account identifies an account at this Bank.• Codebranch: Second group of four numbers of the bank account which identifies the branch uniquely. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • BankAccountType: The Bank Account Type field indicates the type of account (savings. 282/461 .2 C BankAccount Used to define one or more accounts for a Bank. • AccountNo: The Account Number indicates the Number assigned to this account • CurrentBalance: The Current Balance field indicates the current balance in this account. checking etc) this account is defined as. Each account has a unique Account No and Currency. • INE Number: Number provided by the bank to configurate remittances. • C Bank ID: The Bank is a unique identifier of a Bank for this Organization or for a Business Partner with whom this Organization transacts. This can include Vendor. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • Digitcontrol: Tenth number of the bank account. Employee or Salesperson 34. Customer.

• Line2left: Distance from the left side for the 2nd line. 283/461 . • Line1left: Distance from the left side for the 1st line. • C Promissoryformat ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Digitcontrol: Tenth number of the bank account. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.3 C PromissoryFormat It is necessary a Promissory format to print any Promissory Note with each Bank. Currently this format is prepared for the Spanish model.• IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. • C BankAccount ID: The Bank is a unique identifier of a Bank for this Organization or for a Business Partner with whom this Organization transacts. • StmtProcessorClass: The Statement Processor Class indicates the Java Class to process bank statements • Codeaccount: Last ten numbers of the bank account. • Line2top: Distance to the top for the 2nd line. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Line1top: Distance to the top for the 1st line. 34. You cannot share data between Clients.

• Fontmonthplanned: Font size for planned month field. • Param12: Position for 2nd parameter of 1st line. • Param42: Position for 2nd parameter of 4th line. • Line3left: Distance from the left side for the 3rd line. • Param31: Position for 1st parameter of 3rd line. • Printbankloc: Specifies whether bank location is going to be printed. • Fontyearplanned: Font size for planned year field. • Fontdayplanned: Font size for planned day field. • Param41: Position for 1st parameter of 4th line.• Line3top: Distance to the top for the 3rd line. • Param32: Position for 2nd parameter of 3rd line. • Param13: Position for 3rd parameter of 1st line. 284/461 . • Line4top: Distance to the top for the 4th line. • Line4left: Distance from the left side for the 4th line. • Param11: Position for 1st parameter of 1st line. • Param43: Position for 3rd parameter of 4th line. • Fontamount: Font size for amount field.

4 C BankStatement The Bank Statement Tab defines the Bank Statement to be reconciled. • BeginningBalance: The Beginning Balance is the balance prior to making any adjustments for payments or disbursements.• Fontpartnername: Font size for partner name field. • Fontyeartoday: Font size for year to day field. 285/461 . • C BankStatement ID: The Bank Statement identifies a unique Bank Statement for a defined time period. • StatementDate: The Statement Date field defines the date of the statement being processed. You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • C BankAccount ID: The Bank Account identifies an account at this Bank. • Fontdaytoday: Font size for day to day field. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The statement defines all transactions that occurred • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Fontmonthtoday: Font size for month to day field. • IsManual: The Manual check box indicates if the process will done manually. 34. • Fontamounttext: Font size for amount text field.

Withdrawal. You cannot share data between Clients. They can be entered manually or generated from payments entered. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• EndingBalance: The Ending Balance is the result of adjusting the Beginning Balance by any payments or disbursements.5 C BankStatementLine The Statement Line Tab defines the individual line items on the Bank Statement. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • IsReversal: The Reversal check box indicates if this is a reversal of a prior transaction. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines 34. 286/461 . • CreateFrom: The Create From process will create a new document based on information in an existing document selected by the user. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • C BankStatement ID: The Bank Statement identifies a unique Bank Statement for a defined time period. The statement defines all transactions that occurred • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. Charge) for the defined time period at this Bank. • StatementDifference: The Statement Difference reflects the difference between the Statement Ending Balance and the Actual Ending Balance. • C BankStatementLine ID: The Bank Statement Line identifies a unique transaction (Payment.

287/461 . • StmtAmt: The Statement Amount indicates the amount of a single statement line. Restocking) • ChargeAmt: The Charge Amount indicates the amount for an additional charge. • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling. • C Debt Payment ID: Refers to the amount of money to be paid or collected. • C Debt Payment Create: Process to create a debt/payment. • C Dp Management ID: Debt Payment Management allows to manage the changes of status of a debt/payment. Shipping. • Memo: Memo Text • ReferenceNo: The reference number can be printed on orders and invoices to allow your business partner to faster identify your records.• ValutaDate: The Effective Date indicates the date that money is available from the bank. • ConvertChargeAmt: The Convert Charge Amount indicates the amount for an additional charge due to currency conversions. • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • TrxAmt: The Transaction Amount indicates the amount for a single transaction.

6 C Cash The Cash Journal Tab defines the parameters for this journal. The cash book is used to record cash transactions. The Cash Journal will record transactions for the cash bank account • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • BeginningBalance: The Beginning Balance is the balance prior to making any adjustments for payments or disbursements. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • C CashBook ID: The Cash Book identifies a unique cash book. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed.34. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • C Cash ID: The Cash Journal uniquely identifies a Cash Journal. • EndingBalance: The Ending Balance is the result of adjusting the Beginning Balance by any payments or disbursements. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines 288/461 . • StatementDate: The Statement Date field defines the date of the statement being processed. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • StatementDifference: The Statement Difference reflects the difference between the Statement Ending Balance and the Actual Ending Balance. You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign.• AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). You can then report based on a specific Campaign. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • C CashBook ID: The Cash Book identifies a unique cash book. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. 34. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. The cash book is used to record cash transactions. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. 289/461 . with centralized services. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.7 C CashBook The Cashbook Tab defines a unique cashbook for an organization. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. Not implemented yet • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. and inter-organization transactions.

It will also control the display order of the lines within a document.• C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record 34. The Cash Journal will record transactions for the cash bank account • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • C CashLine ID: The Cash Journal Line indicates a unique line in a cash journal. • CashType: The Cash Type indicates the source for this Cash Journal Line. Restocking) • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • Amount: The Amount indicates the amount for this document line. • C Cash ID: The Cash Journal uniquely identifies a Cash Journal. 290/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • DiscountAmt: The Discount Amount indicates the discount amount for a document or line. • WriteOffAmt: The Write Off Amount indicates the amount to be written off as uncollectible.8 C CashLine The Cash Line Tab defines the individual lines for this journal. Shipping. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

• C Debt Payment ID: Refers to the amount of money to be paid or collected. Not implemented yet • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling. Lines could also be entered manually or imported. • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order.• IsGenerated: The Generated checkbox identifies a journal line that was generated from a source document. Not implemented yet • IsSameCurrency: Not implemented yet • C TaxCategory ID: The Tax Category provides a method of grouping similar taxes. This is also known as the gross price. Not implemented yet • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Sales Tax or Value Added Tax. You cannot share data between Clients. Not implemented yet • ChargeAmt: The Charge Amount indicates the amount for an additional charge. Shipping. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Not implemented yet 291/461 . Not implemented yet • IsSameTax: The Same Tax checkbox indicates that this charge should use the same tax as the main transaction. Restocking) • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 34. For example. Not implemented yet • IsTaxIncluded: The Tax Included checkbox indicates if the prices include tax.9 C Charge The Charge Tab defines the unique charges that may be associated with a document.

You can also define non-standard calendars (e. • Year: The Year identifies the accounting year for a calendar.g. 35. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Calendar ID: The Calendar uniquely identifies an accounting calendar. 35. Multiple calendars can be used. For example you may need a standard calendar that runs from Jan 1 to Dec 31 and a fiscal calendar that runs from July 1 to June 30. Year and Period The Calendar Year and Periods defines the calendars that will be used for period control and reporting. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 292/461 . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. For example you may need a standard calendar that runs from Jan 1 to Dec 31 and a fiscal calendar that runs from July 1 to June 30.2 C Year The Year Window is used to define each year for the specified calendar.35 Calendar. Multiple calendars can be used. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • C Calendar ID: The Calendar uniquely identifies an accounting calendar. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.1 C Calendar The Calendar Tab defines each calendar that will be used by an Organization. • C Year ID: The Year uniquely identifies an accounting year for a calendar. business year from July to June).

Year and Period .293/461 Figure 35: Calendar.

The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Each period is defined by a start and end date. • C Year ID: The Year uniquely identifies an accounting year for a calendar. 35. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.• Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • C Period ID: The Period indicates an exclusive range of dates for a calendar. 294/461 . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • PeriodType: The Period Type indicates the type (Standard or Adjustment) of period. • PeriodNo: The Period No identifies a specific period for this year. Date ranges for a calendar and year cannot overlap.3 C Period The Period Tab defines a Period No. Each period begins on the defined Start Date and ends one day prior to the next period’s Start Date. • Create Reg Fact Acct: Process to create regularization accounting entry. You cannot share data between Clients. • StartDate: The Start Date indicates the first or starting date of a range. Name and Start Date for each Calendar Year. • Drop Reg Fact Acct: Process to drop regularization accounting entry. • EndDate: The End Date indicates the last date in this range.

’Open’. Opened.35. 35. ’Never Opened’. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record.5 C NonBusinessDay The Non Business Days Tab defines those days to exclude when calculating the due date for given payment terms.4 C PeriodControl The Period Control records the status of a Period (Never Opened. For example. • C Period ID: The Period indicates an exclusive range of dates for a calendar. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • PeriodAction: The Period Action indicates the action to be taken for this period. Closed) for each of the DocBaseTypes. You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. For example ’Close Period’ or ’Open Period’. Closed) for each of the DocBaseTypes. • C PeriodControl ID: The Period Control shows the status of a Period (Never Opened. Opened. 295/461 . • PeriodStatus: The Period Status indicates the current status for this period. You cannot share data between Clients. • DocBaseType: The Document Base Type identifies the base or starting point for a document. Multiple document types may share a single document base type. if an invoice terms was Net 10 days and the Invoice Date was 2/17/2000 the due date would be 2/27/2000. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. If 2/27/2000 was defined • C NonBusinessDay ID: The Non Business Day identifies a day that should not be considered a day when business is transacted • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. For example ’Closed’.

Multiple calendars can be used.• Date1: The Date field identifies a calendar date on which business will not be conducted. 296/461 . For example you may need a standard calendar that runs from Jan 1 to Dec 31 and a fiscal calendar that runs from July 1 to June 30. • C Calendar ID: The Calendar uniquely identifies an accounting calendar.

• C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. Not implemented yet • CostingMethod: The Costing Method indicates how costs will be calculated (Standard. • IsAccrual: The Accrual checkbox indicates if this accounting schema will use accrual based account or cash based accounting. you have to open and close periods explicitly. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Average) Not implemented yet • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • AutoPeriodControl: In the Automatic Period Control. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.36 Accounting Schema Accounting Schema defines an accounting method and the elements that will comprise an account structure. Cash based method recognizes income when then payment is received. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. If the Manual alternative is activated. 36. Each Organization will select an Accounting Schema to use.1 C AcctSchema The Accounting Schema Tab defines the controls used for accounting. Not implemented yet 297/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. The Accrual method recognizes revenue when the product or service is delivered. • GAAP: The GAAP identifies the account principles that this accounting schema will adhere to. periods are opened and closed based on the current date.

298/461 Figure 36: Accounting Schema .

• C Period ID: The Period indicates an exclusive range of dates for a calendar. • Period OpenHistory: If Automatic Period Control is enabled, the current period is calculated based on the system date and you can always post to all days in the current period. History Days enable to post to previous periods. E.g. today is May 15th and History Days is set to 30, you can post back to April 15th Not implemented yet • Period OpenFuture: If Automatic Period Control is enabled, the current period is calculated based on the system date and you can always post to all days in the current period. Future Days enable to post to future periods. E.g. today is Apr 15th and Future Days is set to 30, you can post up to May 15th Not implemented yet • Separator: The Element Separator defines the delimiter printed between elements of the structure • HasAlias: The Alias checkbox indicates that account combination can be selected using a user defined alias or short key. Not implemented yet • HasCombination: The Combination Control checkbox indicates if the combination of account elements will be verified against the defined acceptable combination. Not implemented yet • IsTradeDiscountPosted: If the invoice is based on an item with a list price, the amount based on the list price and the discount is posted instead of the net amount.Example: Quantity 10 - List Price: 20 - Actual Price: 17If selected for a sales invoice 200 is posted to Produc Not implemented yet • IsDiscountCorrectsTax: Payment discounts may require to correct the tax. This primarily applicable in VAT systems. If the original invoice had tax records, the payment discount, write-off, etc. is corrected by the tax. The calculation of the tax is prorated based on the invoice. Not implemented yet

36.2

C AcctSchema Element

The Account Schema Element defines the elements that comprise the account key. A name is defined which will display in documents. Also the order of the elements and if they are balanced and mandatory are indicated. • C AcctSchema Element ID: The Account Schema Element defines each element that comprise the account key.

299/461

• C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method, currency and calendar • ElementType: The Element Type indicates if this element is the Account element or is a User Defined element. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • C Element ID: The Account Element uniquely identifies an Account Type. These are commonly known as a Chart of Accounts. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • IsMandatory: The Mandatory checkbox indicates if the field is required for a record to be save to the database. • IsBalanced: Needs to be balanced. • Org ID: An organization is a unit of your client or legal entity - examples are store, department. • C ElementValue ID: Account Elements can be natural accounts or user defined values. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This can include Vendor, Customer, Employee or Salesperson • C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity. • C SalesRegion ID: The Sales Region indicates a specific area of sales coverage.

300/461

• C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing

36.3

C AcctSchema Table

Group of tables that can be posted. • C Acctschema Table ID: Group of tables that can be posted. • C Acctschema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method, currency and calendar • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • Acctdescription: SQL that will compose the description of the entries for this table when documents are posted.

36.4

C AcctSchema GL

The General Ledger defines error and balance handling to use as well as the necessary accounts for posting to General Ledger. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method, currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.

301/461

• UseSuspenseBalancing: Use Suspense Balancing • SuspenseBalancing Acct: Account used for suspense balancing • UseSuspenseError: Use Suspense Error • SuspenseError Acct: Accout used for suspense error • UseCurrencyBalancing: Use Currency Balancing • CurrencyBalancing Acct: The Currency Balancing Account indicates the account to used when a currency is out of balance (generally due to rounding) • RetainedEarning Acct: Account used for retained earning • IncomeSummary Acct: Account used for income summary • IntercompanyDueTo Acct: The Intercompany Due To Account indicates the account that represents money owed to other organizations. Not implemented yet • IntercompanyDueFrom Acct: The Intercompany Due From account indicates the account that represents money owed to this organization from other organizations. • PPVOffset Acct: Offset account for standard costing purchase price variances. The counter account is Product PPV.

36.5

C AcctSchema Default

Defines default accounts for an Accounting Schema. These values will display when a new document is opened. The user can override these defaults within the document. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method, currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.

302/461

• W Inventory Acct: The Warehouse Inventory Asset Account identifies the account used for recording the value of your inventory. • W InvActualAdjust Acct: In actual costing systems, this account is used to post Inventory value adjustments. You could set it to the standard Inventory Asset account. Not implemented yet • W Differences Acct: The Warehouse Differences Account indicates the account used recording differences identified during inventory counts. • W Revaluation Acct: The Inventory Revaluation Account identifies the account used to records changes in inventory value due to currency revaluation. • P Revenue Acct: The Product Revenue Account indicates the account used for recording sales revenue for this product. • P Expense Acct: The Product Expense Account indicates the account used to record expenses associated with this product. • P Asset Acct: The Product Asset Account indicates the account used for valuing this a product in inventory. • P PurchasePriceVariance Acct: The Purchase Price Variance is used in Standard Costing. It reflects the difference between the Standard Cost and the Purchase Order Price. Not implemented yet • P InvoicePriceVariance Acct: The Invoice Price Variance is used reflects the difference between the current Costs and the Invoice Price. Not implemented yet • P TradeDiscountRec Acct: The Trade Discount Receivables Account indicates the account for received trade discounts in vendor invoices Not implemented yet • P TradeDiscountGrant Acct: The Trade Discount Granted Account indicates the account for granted trade discount in sales invoices Not implemented yet • P Cogs Acct: The Product COGS Account indicates the account used when recording costs associated with this product.

303/461

• C Receivable Acct: The Customer Receivables Accounts indicates the account to be used for recording transaction for customers receivables. • C Prepayment Acct: The Customer Prepayment account indicates the account to be used for recording prepayments from a customer. Not implemented yet • V Liability Acct: The Vendor Liability account indicates the account used for recording transactions for vendor liabilities • V Liability Services Acct: The Vendor Service Liability account indicates the account to use for recording service liabilities. It is used if you need to distinguish between Liability for products and services Not implemented yet • V Prepayment Acct: The Vendor Prepayment Account indicates the account used to record prepayments from a vendor. Not implemented yet • PayDiscount Exp Acct: Indicates the account to be charged for payment discount expenses. Not implemented yet • WriteOff Acct: The Write Off Account identifies the account to book write off transactions to. • PayDiscount Rev Acct: Indicates the account to be charged for payment discount revenues. Not implemented yet • UnrealizedGain Acct: The Unrealized Gain Account indicates the account to be used when recording gains achieved from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized. Not implemented yet • UnrealizedLoss Acct: The Unrealized Loss Account indicates the account to be used when recording losses incurred from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized. Not implemented yet • RealizedGain Acct: The Realized Gain Account indicates the account to be used when recording gains achieved from currency revaluation that have been realized. Not implemented yet • RealizedLoss Acct: The Realized Loss Account indicates the account to be used when recording losses incurred from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized. Not implemented yet

304/461

• Withholding Acct: The Withholding Account indicates the account used to record withholdings. • E Prepayment Acct: The Employee Prepayment Account identifies the account to use for recording expense advances made to this employee. Not implemented yet • E Expense Acct: The Employee Expense Account identifies the account to use for recording expenses for this employee. Not implemented yet • PJ Asset Acct: The Project Asset account is the account used as the final asset account in capital projects Not implemented yet • PJ WIP Acct: The Work in Process account is the account used in capital projects until the project is completed • T Expense Acct: The Tax Expense Account indicates the account used to record the taxes that have been paid that cannot be reclaimed. Not implemented yet • T Liability Acct: The Tax Liability Account indicates the account used to record your tax liability declaration. Not implemented yet • T Receivables Acct: The Tax Receivables Account indicates the account used to record the tax credit amount after your tax declaration. Not implemented yet • T Due Acct: The Tax Due Account indicates the account used to record taxes that you are liable to pay. • T Credit Acct: The Tax Credit Account indicates the account used to record taxes that can be reclaimed • B InTransit Acct: The Bank in Transit Account identifies the account to be used for funds which are in transit. • B Asset Acct: The Bank Asset Account identifies the account to be used for booking changes to the balance in this bank account

305/461

• B Expense Acct: The Bank Expense Account identifies the account to be used for recording charges or fees incurred from this Bank. • B InterestRev Acct: The Bank Interest Revenue Account identifies the account to be used for recording interest revenue from this Bank. Not implemented yet • B InterestExp Acct: The Bank Interest Expense Account identifies the account to be used for recording interest expenses. Not implemented yet • B Unidentified Acct: The Bank Unidentified Receipts Account identifies the account to be used when recording receipts that can not be reconciled at the present time. Not implemented yet • B UnallocatedCash Acct: Receipts not allocated to Invoices Not implemented yet • B PaymentSelect Acct: AP Payment Selection Clearing Account • B SettlementGain Acct: The Bank Settlement Gain account identifies the account to be used when recording a currency gain when the settlement and receipt currency are not the same. Not implemented yet • B SettlementLoss Acct: The Bank Settlement loss account identifies the account to be used when recording a currency loss when the settlement and receipt currency are not the same. Not implemented yet • B RevaluationGain Acct: The Bank Revaluation Gain Account identifies the account to be used for recording gains that are recognized when converting currencies. • B RevaluationLoss Acct: The Bank Revaluation Loss Account identifies the account to be used for recording losses that are recognized when converting currencies. • Ch Expense Acct: The Charge Expense Account identifies the account to use when recording charges paid to vendors. • Ch Revenue Acct: The Charge Revenue Account identifies the account to use when recording charges paid by customers. Not implemented yet

306/461

• UnEarnedRevenue Acct: The Unearned Revenue indicates the account used for recording invoices sent for products or services not yet delivered. It is used in revenue recognition Not implemented yet • NotInvoicedReceivables Acct: The Not Invoiced Receivables account indicates the account used for recording receivables that have not yet been invoiced. Not implemented yet • NotInvoicedRevenue Acct: The Not Invoiced Revenue account indicates the account used for recording revenue that has not yet been invoiced. Not implemented yet • NotInvoicedReceipts Acct: The Not Invoiced Receipts account indicates the account used for recording receipts for materials that have not yet been invoiced. Not implemented yet • CB Asset Acct: The Cash Book Asset Account identifies the account to be used for recording payments into and disbursements from this cash book. • CB CashTransfer Acct: Account for Invoices paid by cash Not implemented yet • CB Differences Acct: The Cash Book Differences Account identifies the account to be used for recording any differences that affect this cash book • CB Expense Acct: The Cash Book Expense Account identifies the account to be used for general, non itemized expenses. • CB Receipt Acct: The Cash Book Receipt Account identifies the account to be used for general, non itemized cash book receipts. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • C Acctschema Default ID: Default accounts for an Accounting Schema. • Status: Status for the debt payment • A Accumdepreciation Acct: Accumulated Depreciation Account Not implemented yet • A Depreciation Acct: Depreciation account Not implemented yet 307/461

• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Allows user to configure his own accounting report.6 AD AccountingRpt Element Elements that will compose an accounting report. • Filteredbyorganization: • Temporaryfiltertype: • Account ID: The (natural) account used • C Acctschema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. • Isshown: Element will be displayed. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. currency and calendar • Isreport: The Report checkbox indicates that this record is a report as opposed to a process 308/461 . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD Accountingrpt Element ID: Element that will be part of an accounting report.• A Disposal Gain: Disposal Gain account Not implemented yet • A Disposal Loss: Disposal Loss account Not implemented yet 36. • Issummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. You cannot share data between Clients.

309/461 .• Report Type: Refers to the way that this report is gong to calculate the amount for this entry.

00. These are commonly known as a Chart of Accounts. a Type of Account or User Defined is selected. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The User Defined Elements are optional. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. For example. • ElementType: The Element Type indicates if this element is the Account element or is a User Defined element. Not implemented yet • IsNaturalAccount: The natural account is often based on (industry specific) chart of accounts Not implemented yet • AD Tree ID: The Tree field identifies a unique Tree in the system. Account Element is used to define and maintain the Accounting Element and User Defined Elements. • VFormat: Value Format is the format the value will be displayed with. • IsBalancing: The Balancing checkbox indicates the this element must balance in each journal transaction.37 Account Element Account Combination defines and displays valid account combinations. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. This is commonly used to define parts of an organization which report as their own entity. They are used in reports for defining report points 310/461 . Description and Format for an Element. Each Account Schema must have an Account Element type. • C Element ID: The Account Element uniquely identifies an Account Type.1 C Element The Element defines the Name. Additionally. You cannot share data between Clients. Trees define roll ups or summary levels of information. Balancing is not an option for the Account element. 37. if cost centers have been defined as an element which is balance then the debits and credits for each unique cost center must net to 0. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

311/461 Figure 37: Account Element .

R -Revenue and M. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Not implemented yet • Add1Tree ID: The Additional Tree is used to define alternate roll ups which can be used in reporting. For example. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. L . E .Expense. You cannot share data between Clients.Owner Equity. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. C Order). • AccountType: Valid account types are A . you may have a Business Partner Tree which rolls up based on geographic location and an additional tree which rolls up based on industry. For example.Asset. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The account type is used to determine what taxes. Note: Memo account amounts are ignored when checking for balancing 312/461 . if any are applicable.2 C ElementValue The individual valid values for the Element. If you leave the search key empty. The values must conform to the format defined. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. If the Element is an Account Type then the Account Classification (Asset. O.Liability. • Add2Tree ID: The Additional Tree is used to define alternate roll ups which can be used in reporting.g. the system automatically creates a numeric number. you may have a Business Partner Tree which rolls up based on geographic location and an additional tree which rolls up based on industry.Memo. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. validating payables and receivables for business partners.and summarization levels. Not implemented yet 37. Liability etc) and posting controls are also defined • C ElementValue ID: Account Elements can be natural accounts or user defined values.

• AccountSign: Indicates if the expected balance for this account should be a Debit or a Credit. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. • IsDocControlled: Not implemented yet • C Element ID: The Account Element uniquely identifies an Account Type. • ValidFrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range Not implemented yet • ValidTo: The Valid To date indicates the last day of a date range Not implemented yet • PostActual: The Post Actual indicates if actual values can be posted to this element value. Not implemented yet • PostEncumbrance: Not implemented yet • PostStatistical: Not implemented yet • IsBankAccount: The Bank Account checkbox indicates if this is account is the bank account. • C BankAccount ID: The Bank Account identifies an account at this Bank. These are commonly known as a Chart of Accounts. • IsForeignCurrency: Balances in foreign currency accounts are held in the nominated currency and translated to functional currency • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record 313/461 . • IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. Not implemented yet • PostBudget: The Post Budget indicates if budget values can be posted to this element value.

37. • Account ID: The (natural) account used • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Language: The Language identifies the language to use for display 314/461 . 37. • C Elementvalue Operand ID: Operand used to calculate the amount of this element value.• ShowElement: Displays this element.3 C ElementValue Operand Indicates the operands used to calculate the amount of this element value. • Sign: Sign applied to the operand to calculate the amount of the element value. when algebraic it is always dilplayed. • ShowValueCond: Condition to show value. You cannot share data between Clients. breakdown or subaccount). • ElementLevel: Indicates the level of the account (heading. when positive it is shown only if the amount is positive and when negative it is shown only if the amount is negative. • C ElementValue ID: Account Elements can be natural accounts or user defined values.4 C ElementValue Trl Defines the translation of the element value to an alternate language • C ElementValue ID: Account Elements can be natural accounts or user defined values. account.

currency and calendar • Account ID: The (natural) account used 315/461 . • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. 37. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. For example. • C ValidCombination ID: The Combination identifies a valid combination of element which represent a GL account. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.5 C ValidCombination The Account Combination Tab defines and displays valid account combination. • Combination: The Combination field defines the unique combination of element values which comprise this account. • IsTranslated: The Translated checkbox indicates if this column is translated. You cannot share data between Clients. You cannot share data between Clients.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. the Account Receivable Account for Garden World may be aliased as GW AR. An Alias can be defined to facilitate document entry. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • IsFullyQualified: The Fully Qualified check box indicates that all required elements for an account combination are present. • Alias: The Alias field allows you to define a alternate method for referring to a full account combination. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

• C LocTo ID: The Location To indicates the location that a product was moved to. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. Customer. with centralized services. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. 316/461 . • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination.• M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. Not implemented yet • C LocFrom ID: The Location From indicates the location that a product was moved from. and inter-organization transactions. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. This can include Vendor. Employee or Salesperson • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. • C SalesRegion ID: The Sales Region indicates a specific area of sales coverage.

The group of assets determines default accounts. Product Category you to define different groups of products. in the Resource and don’t change it in the product. any Locators for that Warehouse and the Accounting parameters to be used for inventory in that Warehouse. Bank is used to define the banks and accounts associated with an organization or business partner Business Partner Group allows you to define the accounting parameters at a group level. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. The product for the resource is automatically created and synchronized. Charges defines the different charges that may be incurred. These groups can be used in generating Price Lists. This includes customers. Business Partner allows you to define any party with whom you transact. Tax Rate defines the different taxes used for each tax category. 38. Vendor Charges and Handling Charges. These can include Bank Charges. vendors and employees. Warehouse and Locators defines each Warehouse.1 C BP Group Acct Defines the default accounts for any business partner that references this group.38 Accounting Maintain your Resources. These default values can be modified for each business partner if required. Cashbook defines the bank and account against which cash transactions will be processed. Project is used to define the projects which will be tracked via documents. Update Name. used in the manufacture of products sold to customers and products purchased by an organization. currency and calendar • C BP Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners. Unit of Measure. defining margins and for easily assigning different accounting parameters for products. These products include those sold to customers. 317/461 . Accounting Schema defines an accounting method and the elements that will comprise an account structure. Product defines all products used by an organization. etc. You cannot share data between Clients.

318/461 Figure 38: Accounting .

Not implemented yet • V Liability Acct: The Vendor Liability account indicates the account used for recording transactions for vendor liabilities • V Liability Services Acct: The Vendor Service Liability account indicates the account to use for recording service liabilities. Not implemented yet • UnrealizedLoss Acct: The Unrealized Loss Account indicates the account to be used when recording losses incurred from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized. Not implemented yet • WriteOff Acct: The Write Off Account identifies the account to book write off transactions to. Not implemented yet • PayDiscount Exp Acct: Indicates the account to be charged for payment discount expenses. Not implemented yet • RealizedGain Acct: The Realized Gain Account indicates the account to be used when recording gains achieved from currency revaluation that have been realized. Not implemented yet 319/461 . Not implemented yet • PayDiscount Rev Acct: Indicates the account to be charged for payment discount revenues.• C Receivable Acct: The Customer Receivables Accounts indicates the account to be used for recording transaction for customers receivables. Not implemented yet • C Prepayment Acct: The Customer Prepayment account indicates the account to be used for recording prepayments from a customer. Not implemented yet • RealizedLoss Acct: The Realized Loss Account indicates the account to be used when recording losses incurred from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized. It is used if you need to distinguish between Liability for products and services Not implemented yet • V Prepayment Acct: The Vendor Prepayment Account indicates the account used to record prepayments from a vendor. • UnrealizedGain Acct: The Unrealized Gain Account indicates the account to be used when recording gains achieved from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized.

Not implemented yet • NotInvoicedReceivables Acct: The Not Invoiced Receivables account indicates the account used for recording receivables that have not yet been invoiced. Not implemented yet • UnEarnedRevenue Acct: The Unearned Revenue indicates the account used for recording invoices sent for products or services not yet delivered. • C Receivable Acct: The Customer Receivables Accounts indicates the account to be used for recording transaction for customers receivables. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.• NotInvoicedReceipts Acct: The Not Invoiced Receipts account indicates the account used for recording receipts for materials that have not yet been invoiced. You cannot share data between Clients. Customer.2 C BP Customer Acct Defines the default accounts to use when this business partner is referenced on an accounts receivable transaction. Not implemented yet • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • C Bp Group Acct ID: Defines the default accounts for any business partner that references this group. This can include Vendor. 320/461 . • Status: Status for the debt payment 38. Employee or Salesperson • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. It is used in revenue recognition Not implemented yet • NotInvoicedRevenue Acct: The Not Invoiced Revenue account indicates the account used for recording revenue that has not yet been invoiced.

• C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method.• C Prepayment Acct: The Customer Prepayment account indicates the account to be used for recording prepayments from a customer.3 C BP Vendor Acct Defines the default accounts to use when this business partner is referenced in an accounts payable transaction. It is used if you need to distinguish between Liability for products and services Not implemented yet • V Prepayment Acct: The Vendor Prepayment Account indicates the account used to record prepayments from a vendor. • Status: Status for the debt payment 321/461 . • V Liability Acct: The Vendor Liability account indicates the account used for recording transactions for vendor liabilities • V Liability Services Acct: The Vendor Service Liability account indicates the account to use for recording service liabilities. You cannot share data between Clients. currency and calendar • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. Customer. • Status: Status for the debt payment 38. This can include Vendor. Not implemented yet • C Bp Vendor Acct ID: Defines the default accounts to use when this business partner is referenced in an accounts payable transaction. Employee or Salesperson • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Not implemented yet • C Bp Customer Acct ID: Default accounts to use when this business partner is referenced on an accounts receivable transaction.

You cannot share data between Clients. • E Expense Acct: The Employee Expense Account identifies the account to use for recording expenses for this employee. Customer. This can include Vendor.38. Not implemented yet • E Prepayment Acct: The Employee Prepayment Account identifies the account to use for recording expense advances made to this employee. • P Expense Acct: The Product Expense Account indicates the account used to record expenses associated with this product. Not implemented yet 38. • P Revenue Acct: The Product Revenue Account indicates the account used for recording sales revenue for this product. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.4 C BP Employee Acct Defines the default accounts to use when this business partner is referenced on a expense reimbursement. 322/461 . Product categories are used for pricing. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. Employee or Salesperson • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method.5 M Product Category Acct Defines default accounting parameters. Any product that uses a product category can inherit its default accounting parameters. You cannot share data between Clients. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to.

currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • P PurchasePriceVariance Acct: The Purchase Price Variance is used in Standard Costing. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • P Revenue Acct: The Product Revenue Account indicates the account used for recording sales revenue for this product. You cannot share data between Clients. Not implemented yet • P Cogs Acct: The Product COGS Account indicates the account used when recording costs associated with this product.• P Asset Acct: The Product Asset Account indicates the account used for valuing this a product in inventory. 38. Not implemented yet • P TradeDiscountRec Acct: The Trade Discount Receivables Account indicates the account for received trade discounts in vendor invoices Not implemented yet • P TradeDiscountGrant Acct: The Trade Discount Granted Account indicates the account for granted trade discount in sales invoices Not implemented yet • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. Not implemented yet • P InvoicePriceVariance Acct: The Invoice Price Variance is used reflects the difference between the current Costs and the Invoice Price. It reflects the difference between the Standard Cost and the Purchase Order Price. 323/461 . • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method.6 M Product Acct Defines the defaults to use when generating accounting transactions for documents which contain this product.

• C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. You cannot share data between Clients. Not implemented yet • P TradeDiscountRec Acct: The Trade Discount Receivables Account indicates the account for received trade discounts in vendor invoices Not implemented yet • P TradeDiscountGrant Acct: The Trade Discount Granted Account indicates the account for granted trade discount in sales invoices Not implemented yet 38. Not implemented yet • P PurchasePriceVariance Acct: The Purchase Price Variance is used in Standard Costing. It reflects the difference between the Standard Cost and the Purchase Order Price. • P Asset Acct: The Product Asset Account indicates the account used for valuing this a product in inventory. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• P Expense Acct: The Product Expense Account indicates the account used to record expenses associated with this product. • T Due Acct: The Tax Due Account indicates the account used to record taxes that you are liable to pay.7 C Tax Acct Defines the accounting parameters to be used for transactions referencing this Tax Rate. 324/461 . • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. Not implemented yet • P InvoicePriceVariance Acct: The Invoice Price Variance is used reflects the difference between the current Costs and the Invoice Price. Not implemented yet • P Cogs Acct: The Product COGS Account indicates the account used when recording costs associated with this product.

8 C BankAccount Acct Defines the accounts used for transactions with this Bank.• T Liability Acct: The Tax Liability Account indicates the account used to record your tax liability declaration. Not implemented yet 325/461 . • C BankAccount ID: The Bank Account identifies an account at this Bank. Not implemented yet • T Expense Acct: The Tax Expense Account indicates the account used to record the taxes that have been paid that cannot be reclaimed. • B Asset Acct: The Bank Asset Account identifies the account to be used for booking changes to the balance in this bank account • B Expense Acct: The Bank Expense Account identifies the account to be used for recording charges or fees incurred from this Bank. • B InTransit Acct: The Bank in Transit Account identifies the account to be used for funds which are in transit. Not implemented yet 38. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • B InterestRev Acct: The Bank Interest Revenue Account identifies the account to be used for recording interest revenue from this Bank. Not implemented yet • T Credit Acct: The Tax Credit Account indicates the account used to record taxes that can be reclaimed • T Receivables Acct: The Tax Receivables Account indicates the account used to record the tax credit amount after your tax declaration. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method.

• C CashBook ID: The Cash Book identifies a unique cash book. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. 38. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Not implemented yet • B RevaluationGain Acct: The Bank Revaluation Gain Account identifies the account to be used for recording gains that are recognized when converting currencies. Not implemented yet • B Unidentified Acct: The Bank Unidentified Receipts Account identifies the account to be used when recording receipts that can not be reconciled at the present time. The cash book is used to record cash transactions.9 C CashBook Acct Defines the accounting parameters for transaction involving a cashbook.• B InterestExp Acct: The Bank Interest Expense Account identifies the account to be used for recording interest expenses. Not implemented yet • B SettlementLoss Acct: The Bank Settlement loss account identifies the account to be used when recording a currency loss when the settlement and receipt currency are not the same. • B RevaluationLoss Acct: The Bank Revaluation Loss Account identifies the account to be used for recording losses that are recognized when converting currencies. Not implemented yet • B UnallocatedCash Acct: Receipts not allocated to Invoices Not implemented yet • B PaymentSelect Acct: AP Payment Selection Clearing Account Not implemented yet • B SettlementGain Acct: The Bank Settlement Gain account identifies the account to be used when recording a currency gain when the settlement and receipt currency are not the same. 326/461 . You cannot share data between Clients.

• CB Receipt Acct: The Cash Book Receipt Account identifies the account to be used for general. If an asset group is selected in the product category. • A Asset Group ID: The group of assets determines default accounts. assets are created when delivering the asset.• CB Asset Acct: The Cash Book Asset Account identifies the account to be used for recording payments into and disbursements from this cash book.10 A Asset Group Acct Defines the default accounts for any asset that references this group. non itemized expenses. non itemized cash book receipts. • C Acctschema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. • CB CashTransfer Acct: Account for Invoices paid by cash • CB Differences Acct: The Cash Book Differences Account identifies the account to be used for recording any differences that affect this cash book • CB Expense Acct: The Cash Book Expense Account identifies the account to be used for general. 38. You cannot share data between Clients. • A Depreciation Acct: Depreciation account • A Accumdepreciation Acct: Accumulated Depreciation Account • A Disposal Loss: Disposal Loss account Not implemented yet • A Disposal Gain: Disposal Gain account Not implemented yet 327/461 . currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

currency and calendar 328/461 . 38. Shipping. • C Charge ID: The Charge indicates a type of Charge (Handling. • A Depreciation Acct: Depreciation account • A Accumdepreciation Acct: Accumulated Depreciation Account • A Disposal Loss: Disposal Loss account Not implemented yet • A Disposal Gain: Disposal Gain account Not implemented yet 38. You cannot share data between Clients.11 A Asset Acct Defines the default accounts for this asset. Restocking) • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Acctschema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. • A Asset ID: Any item of economic value owned by the corporation. especially that which could be converted to cash.12 C Charge Acct Defines the accounting parameters used for transactions including a charge or charges.• Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record.

You cannot share data between Clients.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 329/461 . 38. The Accounting Tab is used to define the Asset Account to use when a project is completed and the associated asset realized. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Glitem ID: General ledger item.14 C Glitem Acct Defines the default accounts for this general ledger item. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. • Ch Revenue Acct: The Charge Revenue Account identifies the account to use when recording charges paid by customers. • PJ Asset Acct: The Project Asset account is the account used as the final asset account in capital projects Not implemented yet • PJ WIP Acct: The Work in Process account is the account used in capital projects until the project is completed Not implemented yet 38.13 C Project Acct The Accounting Tab is used to define the Asset Account to use when a project is completed and the associated asset realized. • Ch Expense Acct: The Charge Expense Account identifies the account to use when recording charges paid to vendors. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

Not implemented yet • W Differences Acct: The Warehouse Differences Account indicates the account used recording differences identified during inventory counts. • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. You cannot share data between Clients. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• C Acctschema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Glitem Credit Acct: Credit account for the general ledger item.15 M Warehouse Acct Defines the Accounting parameters to be used for inventory in that Warehouse. Not implemented yet • W InvActualAdjust Acct: In actual costing systems. Not implemented yet 330/461 . 38. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. • Glitem Debit Acct: Debit account for the general ledger item. this account is used to post Inventory value adjustments. You could set it to the standard Inventory Asset account. • W Revaluation Acct: The Inventory Revaluation Account identifies the account used to records changes in inventory value due to currency revaluation. • W Inventory Acct: The Warehouse Inventory Asset Account identifies the account used for recording the value of your inventory. You cannot share data between Clients.

• W Inventory Acct: The Warehouse Inventory Asset Account identifies the account used for recording the value of your inventory. • W Revaluation Acct: The Inventory Revaluation Account identifies the account used to records changes in inventory value due to currency revaluation. It reflects the difference between the Standard Cost and the Purchase Order Price. These values will display when a new document is opened. You could set it to the standard Inventory Asset account. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. Not implemented yet 331/461 . Not implemented yet • W Differences Acct: The Warehouse Differences Account indicates the account used recording differences identified during inventory counts. You cannot share data between Clients. • P PurchasePriceVariance Acct: The Purchase Price Variance is used in Standard Costing. • W InvActualAdjust Acct: In actual costing systems. • P Revenue Acct: The Product Revenue Account indicates the account used for recording sales revenue for this product.16 C AcctSchema Default Defines default accounts for an Accounting Schema. Not implemented yet • P InvoicePriceVariance Acct: The Invoice Price Variance is used reflects the difference between the current Costs and the Invoice Price. • P Asset Acct: The Product Asset Account indicates the account used for valuing this a product in inventory. • P Expense Acct: The Product Expense Account indicates the account used to record expenses associated with this product. currency and calendar • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.38. The user can override these defaults within the document. this account is used to post Inventory value adjustments.

• P TradeDiscountRec Acct: The Trade Discount Receivables Account indicates the account for received trade discounts in vendor invoices Not implemented yet • P TradeDiscountGrant Acct: The Trade Discount Granted Account indicates the account for granted trade discount in sales invoices Not implemented yet • P Cogs Acct: The Product COGS Account indicates the account used when recording costs associated with this product. Not implemented yet • V Liability Acct: The Vendor Liability account indicates the account used for recording transactions for vendor liabilities • V Liability Services Acct: The Vendor Service Liability account indicates the account to use for recording service liabilities. • C Prepayment Acct: The Customer Prepayment account indicates the account to be used for recording prepayments from a customer. • C Receivable Acct: The Customer Receivables Accounts indicates the account to be used for recording transaction for customers receivables. Not implemented yet • UnrealizedGain Acct: The Unrealized Gain Account indicates the account to be used when recording gains achieved from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized. It is used if you need to distinguish between Liability for products and services Not implemented yet • V Prepayment Acct: The Vendor Prepayment Account indicates the account used to record prepayments from a vendor. Not implemented yet • WriteOff Acct: The Write Off Account identifies the account to book write off transactions to. • PayDiscount Rev Acct: Indicates the account to be charged for payment discount revenues. Not implemented yet • PayDiscount Exp Acct: Indicates the account to be charged for payment discount expenses. Not implemented yet 332/461 .

Not implemented yet • E Expense Acct: The Employee Expense Account identifies the account to use for recording expenses for this employee. Not implemented yet • Withholding Acct: The Withholding Account indicates the account used to record withholdings. Not implemented yet • RealizedGain Acct: The Realized Gain Account indicates the account to be used when recording gains achieved from currency revaluation that have been realized. Not implemented yet • T Liability Acct: The Tax Liability Account indicates the account used to record your tax liability declaration. Not implemented yet • T Receivables Acct: The Tax Receivables Account indicates the account used to record the tax credit amount after your tax declaration.• UnrealizedLoss Acct: The Unrealized Loss Account indicates the account to be used when recording losses incurred from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized. • E Prepayment Acct: The Employee Prepayment Account identifies the account to use for recording expense advances made to this employee. 333/461 . Not implemented yet • T Due Acct: The Tax Due Account indicates the account used to record taxes that you are liable to pay. Not implemented yet • RealizedLoss Acct: The Realized Loss Account indicates the account to be used when recording losses incurred from currency revaluation that have yet to be realized. Not implemented yet • PJ Asset Acct: The Project Asset account is the account used as the final asset account in capital projects Not implemented yet • PJ WIP Acct: The Work in Process account is the account used in capital projects until the project is completed • T Expense Acct: The Tax Expense Account indicates the account used to record the taxes that have been paid that cannot be reclaimed.

334/461 . Not implemented yet • B RevaluationGain Acct: The Bank Revaluation Gain Account identifies the account to be used for recording gains that are recognized when converting currencies. Not implemented yet • B InterestExp Acct: The Bank Interest Expense Account identifies the account to be used for recording interest expenses. Not implemented yet • B SettlementLoss Acct: The Bank Settlement loss account identifies the account to be used when recording a currency loss when the settlement and receipt currency are not the same.• T Credit Acct: The Tax Credit Account indicates the account used to record taxes that can be reclaimed • B InTransit Acct: The Bank in Transit Account identifies the account to be used for funds which are in transit. Not implemented yet • B UnallocatedCash Acct: Receipts not allocated to Invoices Not implemented yet • B PaymentSelect Acct: AP Payment Selection Clearing Account • B SettlementGain Acct: The Bank Settlement Gain account identifies the account to be used when recording a currency gain when the settlement and receipt currency are not the same. • B Asset Acct: The Bank Asset Account identifies the account to be used for booking changes to the balance in this bank account • B Expense Acct: The Bank Expense Account identifies the account to be used for recording charges or fees incurred from this Bank. • B InterestRev Acct: The Bank Interest Revenue Account identifies the account to be used for recording interest revenue from this Bank. Not implemented yet • B Unidentified Acct: The Bank Unidentified Receipts Account identifies the account to be used when recording receipts that can not be reconciled at the present time.

Not implemented yet • UnEarnedRevenue Acct: The Unearned Revenue indicates the account used for recording invoices sent for products or services not yet delivered. • Ch Expense Acct: The Charge Expense Account identifies the account to use when recording charges paid to vendors. 335/461 . • CB Receipt Acct: The Cash Book Receipt Account identifies the account to be used for general.• B RevaluationLoss Acct: The Bank Revaluation Loss Account identifies the account to be used for recording losses that are recognized when converting currencies. non itemized cash book receipts. Not implemented yet • NotInvoicedRevenue Acct: The Not Invoiced Revenue account indicates the account used for recording revenue that has not yet been invoiced. Not implemented yet • CB Asset Acct: The Cash Book Asset Account identifies the account to be used for recording payments into and disbursements from this cash book. • CB CashTransfer Acct: Account for Invoices paid by cash Not implemented yet • CB Differences Acct: The Cash Book Differences Account identifies the account to be used for recording any differences that affect this cash book • CB Expense Acct: The Cash Book Expense Account identifies the account to be used for general. non itemized expenses. • Ch Revenue Acct: The Charge Revenue Account identifies the account to use when recording charges paid by customers. Not implemented yet • NotInvoicedReceipts Acct: The Not Invoiced Receipts account indicates the account used for recording receipts for materials that have not yet been invoiced. It is used in revenue recognition Not implemented yet • NotInvoicedReceivables Acct: The Not Invoiced Receivables account indicates the account used for recording receivables that have not yet been invoiced. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record.

• Status: Status for the debt payment • A Accumdepreciation Acct: Accumulated Depreciation Account Not implemented yet • A Depreciation Acct: Depreciation account Not implemented yet • A Disposal Gain: Disposal Gain account Not implemented yet • A Disposal Loss: Disposal Loss account Not implemented yet 336/461 .• C Acctschema Default ID: Default accounts for an Accounting Schema.

A Batch can consist of multiple Journals. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Multiple document types may share a single document base type. entered manually or imported. 39. • IsDefault: The Default Checkbox indicates if this record will be used as a default value. • DocBaseType: The Document Base Type identifies the base or starting point for a document. You cannot share data between Clients. 337/461 . Journals can be generated from a document. • CategoryType: The Category Type indicates the source of the journal for this category. Each Category may be used on a document. manual journal or import • GL Category ID: The General Ledger Category is an optional. • GL JournalBatch ID: The General Ledger Journal Batch identifies a group of journals to be processed as a group. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. These categories provide a method of optionally grouping and reporting on journals. user defined method of grouping journal lines. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.2 GL JournalBatch The GL Journal Batch Tab defines the control parameters for a Journal Batch. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. GL Journal allows you to enter and modify manual journal entries 39.1 GL Category The GL Category Tab defines optional identifiers for a document or journal.39 General Ledger and Budget GL Category allows you to define categories to be used in journals.

338/461 Figure 39: General Ledger and Budget .

• DateDoc: The Document Date indicates the date the document was generated. the system will generate a document number for you. Budget) this journal updated. the field is empty if you create a new document. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿.g. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • TotalDr: The Total Debit indicates the total debit amount for a journal or journal batch in the source currency • TotalCr: The Total Credit indicates the total credit amount for a journal or journal batch in the source currency 339/461 . If you leave the field empty. Encumbrance. You cannot share data between Clients. • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • C Period ID: The Period indicates an exclusive range of dates for a calendar. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice).If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. C Order). • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. • PostingType: The Posting Type indicates the type of amount (Actual. user defined method of grouping journal lines. If the document is not saved. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • GL Category ID: The General Ledger Category is an optional.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. It may or may not be the same as the accounting date.

The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿.Otherwise the total Debit amount must be equal to the control amount.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. You cannot share data between Clients. before the document is processed. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. C Order). the field is empty if you create a new document. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. 39.• ControlAmt: If the control amount is zero. If you leave the field empty.3 GL Journal The GL Journal Tab defines the control parameters for a single GL Journal.g. the system will generate a document number for you. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). currency and calendar • C DocType ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. If the document is not saved. • GL Journal ID: The General Ledger Journal identifies a group of journal lines which represent a logical business transaction • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 340/461 . no check is performed. • CopyFrom: Copy record lines • IsTemplate: Template is checked when the element is used as a template.

• GL Category ID: The General Ledger Category is an optional.• DocStatus: The Document Status indicates the status of a document at this time. If you want to change the document status. 341/461 . The options are listed in a popup • IsApproved: The Approved checkbox indicates if this document requires approval before it can be processed. For example you may have a set of rates used for daily transactions with a rate type of SPOT and rates for currency revaluation defined as REVAL. user defined method of grouping journal lines. • PostingType: The Posting Type indicates the type of amount (Actual. It may or may not be the same as the accounting date. It allows you to define multiple rates for the same to and from currency. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • CurrencyRateType: The Conversion Rate Type indicates the type of rate to use when retrieving the conversion rate. • IsPrinted: The Printed checkbox indicates if this document or line will included when printing. Encumbrance. Budget) this journal updated. use the Document Action field • DocAction: You find the current status in the Document Status field. Not implemented yet • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • DateDoc: The Document Date indicates the date the document was generated. • GL Budget ID: The General Ledger Budget identifies a user defined budget. • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • C Period ID: The Period indicates an exclusive range of dates for a calendar. These can be used in reporting as a comparison against your actual amounts.

• GL JournalLine ID: The General Ledger Journal Line identifies a single transaction in a journal. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed.4 GL JournalLine The GL Journal Line Tab defines the individual debit and credit transactions that comprise a journal. • GL Journal ID: The General Ledger Journal identifies a group of journal lines which represent a logical business transaction 342/461 . no check is performed.Otherwise the total Debit amount must be equal to the control amount. before the document is processed. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines 39. You cannot share data between Clients. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • TotalDr: The Total Debit indicates the total debit amount for a journal or journal batch in the source currency • TotalCr: The Total Credit indicates the total credit amount for a journal or journal batch in the source currency • ControlAmt: If the control amount is zero.• CurrencyRate: The Currency Conversion Rate indicates the rate to use when converting the source currency to the accounting currency • GL JournalBatch ID: The General Ledger Journal Batch identifies a group of journals to be processed as a group.

343/461 . It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. It allows you to define multiple rates for the same to and from currency. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • CurrencyRateType: The Conversion Rate Type indicates the type of rate to use when retrieving the conversion rate. • CurrencyRate: The Currency Conversion Rate indicates the rate to use when converting the source currency to the accounting currency • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • AmtAcctDr: The Account Debit Amount indicates the transaction amount converted to this organization’s accounting currency • AmtAcctCr: The Account Credit Amount indicates the transaction amount converted to this organization’s accounting currency • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. For example you may have a set of rates used for daily transactions with a rate type of SPOT and rates for currency revaluation defined as REVAL. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.• Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • IsGenerated: The Generated checkbox identifies a journal line that was generated from a source document. • AmtSourceDr: The Source Debit Amount indicates the credit amount for this line in the source currency. • AmtSourceCr: The Source Credit Amount indicates the credit amount for this line in the source currency. Lines could also be entered manually or imported.

sales or purchase budgets. You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 344/461 .5 C Budget The Budgets are used to define the anticipated costs of doing business. 39. • C Budgetline ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Budget Type: Clasifies budgets. • Exportexcel: Process to export budget to excel file. They are used in reporting as a comparison to actual amounts. • C Budget ID: Used to define the anticipated costs of doing business • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.6 C BudgetLine Refers to the lines associated to a budget. • C Year ID: The Year uniquely identifies an accounting year for a calendar. 39. • Copybudget: Process to copy a budget. They can be financial. You cannot share data between Clients.• C ValidCombination ID: The Combination identifies a valid combination of element which represent a GL account. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.

Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. Employee or Salesperson • AD Orgtrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. and inter-organization transactions. with centralized services. 345/461 . • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. Customer. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • C Uom ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. This can include Vendor. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. • C Period ID: The Period indicates an exclusive range of dates for a calendar. Not implemented yet • C Salesregion ID: The Sales Region indicates a specific area of sales coverage.• C ValidCombination ID: The Combination identifies a valid combination of element which represent a GL account. You can then report based on a specific Campaign.

• User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records • C Bp Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Product categories are used for pricing. 346/461 . • C Budget ID: Used to define the anticipated costs of doing business • Amount: The Amount indicates the amount for this document line. • Price: The Price indicates the Price for a product or service. • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to.

40. The group of assets determines default accounts. assets are created when delivering the asset.1 A Asset Any item of economic value owned by the corporation. assets are created when delivering the asset. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.g. 347/461 . • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.40 Assets An asset is created by delivering a product. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. • A Asset Group ID: The group of assets determines default accounts. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • A Asset ID: Any item of economic value owned by the corporation. especially that which could be converted to cash. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. comment or help about the use of this item. the system automatically creates a numeric number. You cannot share data between Clients. especially that which could be converted to cash. C Order). • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. If an asset group is selected in the product category. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. If a asset group is selected in the product category. An asset can be used internally or be a customer asset. If you leave the search key empty.

348/461 Figure 40: Assets .

Employee or Salesperson • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner 349/461 . • UseLifeYears: Years of the usable life of the asset • UseLifeMonths: Months of the usable life of the asset • LifeUseUnits: Life use and the actual use may be used to calculate the depreciation • UseUnits: Currently used units of the assets • IsDisposed: The asset is no longer used and disposed • AssetDisposalDate: Date when the asset is/was disposed • IsInPosession: Assets which are not in possession are e.g. if the asset is used internally and depreciated. • IsOwned: The asset may not be in possession. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.usually used as start date for depreciation.• GuaranteeDate: Date when the normal guarantee or availability expires • AssetServiceDate: The date when the asset was put into service . Customer. This can include Vendor. at Customer site and may or may not be owned by the company. but the asset is legally owned by the organization • AssetDepreciationDate: Date of the last deprecation. • LocationComment: • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located.

It can only be used when the quantity is 1. • IsDepreciated: The asset is used internally and will be depreciated • IsFullyDepreciated: The asset costs are fully amortized. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • Datepurchased: Date when this good was bougth. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • Datecancelled: Cancellation date • Amortizationstartdate: Date in which this asset starts depreciating • Amortizationenddate: Date in which this asset ends depreciating • Annualamortizationporcentage: Anual percentage used to depreciate this asset. warranted product. • M AttributesetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • SerNo: The Serial Number identifies a tracked. • Lot: The Lot Number indicates the specific lot that a product was part of. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • Assetvalueamt: Book Value of the asset • Residualassetvalueamt: Value of the asset once it has been totally depreciated. • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. 350/461 .• C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity.

• Profit: • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document.). C Order). • Amortizationcalctype: This field indicates how depreciation will be calculated: choosing the time or the percentage. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. yearly. Not implemented yet • Depreciatedpreviousamt: 351/461 . the system will generate a document number for you. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.g. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. If the document is not saved. • Depreciatedplan: Value that is planned to be depreciated. • Cause: • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document.• VersionNo: Version Number • Acctvalueamt: Accounting value amount • Amortizationtype: Indicates the method used to depreciate this asset.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined... the field is empty if you create a new document. If you leave the field empty. • Amortizationvalueamt: Accumulate depreciation amount • Assetschedule: Refers to the periods chosen between depreciation entries (monthly.

You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.2 A Asset Group The group of assets determines default accounts. • IsOwned: The asset may not be in possession. comment or help about the use of this item. 40. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.3 A Amortization Refers to all the depreciations ocurred btween two dates • A Amortization ID: Refers to all the depreciations ocurred btween two dates • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. If a asset group is selected in the product category. assets are created when delivering the asset.• Depreciatedvalue: Is the value depreciated from processed amortizations. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • A Asset Group ID: The group of assets determines default accounts. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. assets are created when delivering the asset. 352/461 . but the asset is legally owned by the organization • IsDepreciated: The asset is used internally and will be depreciated 40. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. If an asset group is selected in the product category.

• C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • Totalamortization: Total Amortization amount 353/461 . • Enddate: The End Date indicates the last date in this range. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • Startdate: The Start Date indicates the first or starting date of a range. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign.

It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • A Asset ID: Any item of economic value owned by the corporation. • Amortization Porcentage: Amortization Percentage • Amortizationamt: Amortization Amount • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record 354/461 . You cannot share data between Clients.4 A Amortizationline Depreciation of an asset between two dates • A Amortizationline ID: Depreciation of an asset between two dates • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. especially that which could be converted to cash.40. • A Amortization ID: Refers to all the depreciations ocurred btween two dates • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document.

1 Fact Acct Recods accounting entries of all accounting schemas. • Fact Acct ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. • C AcctSchema ID: An Accounting Schema defines the rules used in accounting such as costing method. You cannot share data between Clients. Deprecated 355/461 . These can be used in reporting as a comparison against your actual amounts.41 Accounting Facts Query the detail accounting transactions 41. • Record ID: The Record ID is the internal unique identifier of a record • Line ID: Internal link • GL Category ID: The General Ledger Category is an optional. • GL Budget ID: The General Ledger Budget identifies a user defined budget. user defined method of grouping journal lines. currency and calendar • Account ID: The (natural) account used • DateTrx: The Transaction Date indicates the date of the transaction. • DateAcct: The Accounting Date indicates the date to be used on the General Ledger account entries generated from this document • C Period ID: The Period indicates an exclusive range of dates for a calendar.

356/461 Figure 41: Accounting Facts .

with centralized services. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.• C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line. • AmtSourceCr: The Source Credit Amount indicates the credit amount for this line in the source currency. Budget) this journal updated. and inter-organization transactions. Encumbrance. Employee or Salesperson • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). • PostingType: The Posting Type indicates the type of amount (Actual. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. Customer. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. • AmtAcctDr: The Account Debit Amount indicates the transaction amount converted to this organization’s accounting currency • AmtAcctCr: The Account Credit Amount indicates the transaction amount converted to this organization’s accounting currency • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. Not implemented yet 357/461 . • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • AmtSourceDr: The Source Debit Amount indicates the credit amount for this line in the source currency. This can include Vendor.

• User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. • C LocTo ID: The Location To indicates the location that a product was moved to. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • C SalesRegion ID: The Sales Region indicates a specific area of sales coverage. especially that which could be converted to cash. • A Asset ID: Any item of economic value owned by the corporation.• C LocFrom ID: The Location From indicates the location that a product was moved from. Not implemented yet 358/461 .

The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. C Order). the system automatically creates a numeric number.1 MA ProcessPlan In this table is defined the header of the process plan. • Secondaryunit: Is an optional unit to define the number of times that is desired to perform the process. • Conversionrate: It is the rate between primary unit and secondary unit. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Primary quantity = (secondary quantity)/(conversion rate) • Copyversion: Process which from a selected reference version copies it into a new one changing the correspondent time periods. • MA Processplan ID: Indicates a process plan. 42. • Explodephases: Indicates if the work requirement phases will be generated automatically. If you leave the search key empty.42 Manufacturing: Process Plan A process plan is a set of sequences or processes that elaborates one or more diferent products. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 359/461 .g. You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

360/461 Figure 42: Manufacturing: Process Plan .

This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice).3 MA Sequence In the Sequence table there are defined all the processes that belongs to the selected process plan. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. You cannot share data between Clients. C Order). • MA Process ID: Indicates a manufacturing process of the enterprise. • Dateto: The Date To indicates the end date of a range (inclusive) 42. 361/461 . • MA Processplan Version ID: Indicates a process plan version. the field is empty if you create a new document. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document.g. • Datefrom: The Date From indicates the starting date of a range. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. the system will generate a document number for you. • MA Processplan ID: Indicates a process plan. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Sequence ID: The sequence relates the operations with the process plan. If the document is not saved. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined.2 MA ProcessPlan Version This table allows different production plan versions • MA Processplan Version ID: Indicates a process plan version. If you leave the field empty. You cannot share data between Clients.42.

You can use (consume)&nbsp.are automatically filled in&nbsp. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.as specified in&nbsp. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. the system automatically creates a numeric number.the same product in several ones. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName.¡/p¿ ¡p¿If this is checked. work requirement phase or production run.• Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. If you leave the search key empty.¡/p¿ • Preptime: Preparation time needed in hours.by running the &quot. If you prefer having the total&nbsp. • Multiplier: ¡p¿Number of times needed to run this&nbsp. C Order).¡/p¿ • Groupuse: Each work effort can have several production runs.the work requirement phases.generating standards&quot. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.sequence in order to satisfy the complete process plan. check this box.usage products (grouoped by product)&nbsp. process required input and output product quantities&nbsp.&nbsp. the quantities will not be filled in and will be set to zero. 362/461 . • Calculated: Indicates that the record has been calculated.for all production runs in Global Use tab.g.¡/p¿ • Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records • Noqty: ¡p¿When&nbsp. • CostCenterUse: ¡p¿The duration of this sequence in hours.creating a production run. Not implemented yet • Outsourced: Indicates that the correspondent process is being outsourced for the sequence.

You cannot share data between Clients.¡/p¿ 42. • C Salary Category ID: Indicates a salary category • Calccost: Is the calculated cost amount. • MA Sequence Ic ID: Indicates an indirect standard cost amount for a sequence. You cannot share data between Clients. • MA Sequence ID: The sequence relates the operations with the process plan. • Calccost: Is the calculated cost amount. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.5 MA Sequence IC Table where is stored each indirect standard cost amount for a sequence.4 MA Sequence Employee Table where is stored information about the salary costs of the standard cost calculation. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Indirect Cost ID: Indicates an indirect cost. 363/461 . you need to input the standard outsourcing cost here. • MA Sequence ID: The sequence relates the operations with the process plan. 42.• Outsourcingcost: ¡p¿If the sequence of a Process Plan is outsourced. • MA Sequence Employee ID: Indicates each salary category standard cost amount for a sequence.

42. There must be defined both the raw materials and the generated products. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Machine ID: Indicates a machine of the enterprise. • Calccost: Is the calculated cost amount. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. A positive production means that is an output product. • MA Sequenceproduct ID: Indicates each product involved on a sequence. • MA Sequence Machine ID: Indicates each machine standard cost amount for a sequence. You cannot share data between Clients.a negative productions refers to an input product.6 MA Sequence Machine Table where is stored each machine standard cost amount for a sequence. • MA Sequence ID: The sequence relates the operations with the process plan. • Quantity: Indicates the quantity of product needed to process one time the sequence. • Productiontype: Indicates if the product is used in the sequence or is generated.42. You cannot share data between Clients. So&nbsp.7 MA SequenceProduct In this table there are defined all the products involved in the sequence. • C Uom ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure 364/461 . • MA Sequence ID: The sequence relates the operations with the process plan.

• Componentcost: Cost per component • Rminput: Custom code. • M Product Uom ID: Alternative order uom for the product. Deprecated • Cost: Cost amount. Deprecated • Decreaseind: Custom code. Deprecated • Decrease: Percentage of decrease.• Quantityorder: Product quantity in the order uom. 365/461 . • Rejected: Percentage of parts rejected • Consumerm: Custom code.

366/461 .1 MA WorkRequirement In this table it’s defined the header of the requirement. • Launchdate: The Launch Date indicates the date that the work requiremente was made. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Explote: Process to explode the phases and/or insert the correspondent products to them. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. Not implemented yet • MA Processplan ID: Indicates a process plan. 43. here it’s indicated for example the process plan. You cannot share data between Clients.43 Manufacturing: Work Requirement Work requirement defines all the manufacturing needs of the process plans. • Quantity: Indicates the quantity of product needed to process one time the sequence. • Enddate: The End Date indicates the last date in this range. • MA Workrequirement ID: Indicates a work requirement. • Closed: Indicates if the work requirement phase has been completely done. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Startdate: The Start Date indicates the first or starting date of a range. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

367/461 Figure 43: Manufacturing: Work Requirement .

• Conversionrate: It is the rate between primary unit and secondary unit. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). C Order). Deprecated 43. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. Each phase corresponds to a sequence of the selected&nbsp. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • Explodephases: Indicates if the work requirement phases will be generated automatically. • Secondaryqty: Secondary quantity. 368/461 . You cannot share data between Clients.process plan. the field is empty if you create a new document.• DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. the system will generate a document number for you. • MA Process ID: Indicates a manufacturing process of the enterprise. If the document is not saved. If you leave the field empty.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined.g. • MA Workrequirement ID: Indicates a work requirement. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Wrphase ID: Indicates a Work Requirement Phase. Primary quantity = (secondary quantity)/(conversion rate) • WrType: Custom code.2 MA WRPhase In this table there are defined the diferent phases of the work requirement. • Secondaryunit: Is an optional unit to define the number of times that is desired to perform the process.

creating a production run. work requirement phase or production run. process required input and output product quantities&nbsp.the same product in several ones. the quantities will not be filled in and will be set to zero. Not implemented yet • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 369/461 .the work requirement phases. • CostCenterUse: ¡p¿The duration of this sequence in hours.&nbsp.for all production runs in Global Use tab.by running the &quot. You can use (consume)&nbsp.generating standards&quot. • Donequantity: Indicates the number of times that the work requirement phase has been allready processed. • Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records • Noqty: ¡p¿When&nbsp. Not implemented yet • Closed: Indicates if the work requirement phase has been completely done. • MA Sequence ID: The sequence relates the operations with the process plan.• Quantity: Indicates the quantity of product needed to process one time the sequence.as specified in&nbsp. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. If you prefer having the total&nbsp.¡/p¿ • Groupuse: Each work effort can have several production runs.usage products (grouoped by product)&nbsp.are automatically filled in&nbsp. check this box. • Outsourced: Indicates that the correspondent process is being outsourced for the sequence.¡/p¿ • Preptime: Preparation time needed in hours.¡/p¿ ¡p¿If this is checked. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

• MA Wrphaseproduct ID: Indicates each product involved in the work requirement phase.43. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. A positive production means that is an output product. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. There must be defined both the raw materials and the generated products. • C Uom ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • Quantityorder: Product quantity in the order uom. • Movementqty: The Movement Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been moved. • M Product Uom ID: Alternative order uom for the product. You cannot share data between Clients. • Productiontype: Indicates if the product is used in the sequence or is generated. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. So&nbsp. Deprecated 370/461 .a negative productions refers to an input product. Deprecated • Decreaseind: Custom code.3 MA WRPhaseProduct In this tab there are defined all the products involved in the work requirement phase. Not implemented yet • MA Wrphase ID: Indicates a Work Requirement Phase. • Consumerm: Custom code.

1 MA PL Employee In this table are the employees of each salary category involved on each production run. Among produced and used products is stored all related data for the costs calculation. • M Productionplan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product. • MA Pl Ic ID: Indicates the indirect costs involved on each production run. 44. You cannot share data between Clients.44 Manufacturing: Work Effort In work effort is stored the work efforts that the employees have done during their work day. • MA Pl Employee ID: Indicates the employees of each salary category involved on each production run. 371/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. • M Productionplan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product. • Costuom: Unit of Measure for cost 44. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • C Salary Category ID: Indicates a salary category • Quantity: Indicates the quantity of product needed to process one time the sequence.2 MA PL IC In this table are stored the indirect costs involved on each production run.

372/461 Figure 44: Manufacturing: Work Effort .

• MA Indirect Cost ID: Indicates an indirect cost. • Use: Indicates the use coefficient. • M Productionplan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product. • C Invoiceline ID: The Invoice Line uniquely identifies a single line of an Invoice.4 MA PL Machine In this table are stored the machine costs involved on each production run. • MA Machine ID: Indicates a machine of the enterprise. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. 373/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.3 MA PL InvoiceLine In this table are stored the invoice lines involved on each production run. • M Productionplan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product. • MA Pl Invoiceline ID: Indicates the invoice lines involved on each production run. • Cost: Cost amount. 44. 44. • MA Pl Machine ID: Indicates the machine costs involved on each production run.

374/461 . Customer.5 MA WEEmployee In this table are introduced all the employees that have participate on the work effort. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • M Production ID: The Production uniquely identifies a Production Plan • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • M Production ID: The Production uniquely identifies a Production Plan • MA Incidence ID: Unique identifier for incidence • Starttime: Start time in hours. • MA Weemployee ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Employee or Salesperson 44. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.6 MA WEIncidence In this table are all the incidences that may have happened. • MA Weincidence ID: Indicates each incidence of a work effort. • Endtime: End time in hours. You cannot share data between Clients. This can include Vendor.44. You cannot share data between Clients.

with centralized services. receipt or inventory movement. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. • IsCreated: Check to indicate that the records has been created and the production is ready to be processed. You cannot share data between Clients. and inter-organization transactions. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Posted: The Posted field indicates the status of the Generation of General Ledger Accounting Lines • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed.44. 375/461 . The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program.7 M Production Contains the header of the work effort • M Production ID: The Production uniquely identifies a Production Plan • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MovementDate: The Movement Date indicates the date that a product moved in or out of inventory. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. This is the result of a shipment. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record.

the field is empty if you create a new document.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. 44. • Issotrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). • User2 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. • Starttime: Start time in hours. • Validating: Process to validate the work effort. If you leave the field empty.8 M ProductionLine Contains all the products that have been used or created in the production run and the quantities • M ProductionLine ID: The Production Line indicates the production document line (if applicable) for this transaction • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. the system will generate a document number for you. You cannot share data between Clients. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. C Order). If the document is not saved.• C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • User1 ID: The user defined element displays the optional elements that have been defined for this account combination. 376/461 . • Endtime: End time in hours.g.

• Productiontype: Indicates if the product is used in the sequence or is generated. • MovementQty: The Movement Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been moved. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • PrintLabel: Process to print labels for the product. • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • M Product Uom Id: Alternative order uom for the product. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.• M ProductionPlan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product. So&nbsp. • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document.a negative productions refers to an input product. Deprecated • Calculated: Indicates that the record has been calculated. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • QuantityOrder: Product quantity in the order uom. Custom code. • Secquality: Custom code. Deprecated 377/461 . • Rejectedquantity: How many products have been rejected. A positive production means that is an output product.

• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • ProductionQty: The Production Quantity identifies the number of products to produce • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • Conversionrate: It is the rate between primary unit and secondary unit.9 M ProductionPlan Contains the items used and generated in a production • M ProductionPlan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product. Primary quantity = (secondary quantity)/(conversion rate) • MA Costcenteruse: Use of the cost center.44. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Neededquantity: How many times it is necessary to complete a phase before closing it. • M Production ID: The Production uniquely identifies a Production Plan • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. • Realcost: Real Cost 378/461 . • MA Wrphase ID: Indicates a Work Requirement Phase.

When the work effort is processed the global use products are distributed proportionaly. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 379/461 . • MA Globaluse ID: Identifies a globally used product in the work effort. • Outsourced: Indicates that the correspondent process is being outsourced for the sequence. 44. • MA Costcenter Version ID: Identifies a cost center version valid during a time period. • Secondaryunit: Is an optional unit to define the number of times that is desired to perform the process. • Secondaryqty: Secondary quantity. • M Production ID: The Production uniquely identifies a Production Plan • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • M Product Uom ID: Alternative order uom for the product. You cannot share data between Clients.10 MA GlobalUse This tabs contains global consume products. • Usedmaterial: Process to generate standards on production run. work requirement phase or production run.• Rejectedquantity: How many products have been rejected. • C Uom ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • Movementqty: The Movement Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that has been moved.

• M Attributesetinstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes 380/461 . • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located.• Quantityorder: Product quantity in the order uom.

45 Manufacturing: Toolset Work Station defines the diferent work stations of the enterprise. the system automatically creates a numeric number. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. In case that are needed in this tab are introduced the diferent toolset used in the selected process. • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. • Numberuses: Number of uses of the toolset • Discarded: Indicates that it’s no longer used. • MA Toolset Type ID: Indicates a Toolset Type of the enterprise.g. With the stations there are indicated the diferent machines that compose it. the processes that are done in the station and the toolsets used in each process. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record.2 MA ToolsetProcess In case that are needed in this tab are introduced the diferent toolset used in the selected process. C Order). 45. You cannot share data between Clients. 45. If you leave the search key empty.1 MA Toolset The Toolset tab is used to detail the different types of toolsets that each company has. Toolset defines different toolset registration for further use on the production. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • MA Toolsetprocess ID: Toolset Process 381/461 . • MA Toolset ID: Toolset • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

382/461 Figure 45: Manufacturing: Toolset .

You cannot share data between Clients. • MA Toolset Type ID: Indicates a Toolset Type of the enterprise. • MA Toolset ID: Toolset • M ProductionPlan ID: The Production Plan identifies the items and steps in generating a product.3 MA Toolset Type The Toolset Type tab is used to detail the different types of toolsets that exist.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • MA Process ID: Indicates a manufacturing process of the enterprise. 45. • MA Toolset Type ID: Indicates a Toolset Type of the enterprise. 383/461 .4 MA ToolsetUsed In this tab are introduced the diferent toolset used in the production run. You cannot share data between Clients. • Usecycle: Indicates the number of years that it’s useful 45. • Usecoef: Coefficient of use that indicates the number of time that the toolset is used while the work requirement phase is processed once. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

• MA Toolsetused ID: Indicates the toolsets used in the production run. • Used: Number of uses of the toolset in the production run. 384/461 . You cannot share data between Clients.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Datadate: Date when the data was taken.2 MA PC Value This tab registrates the planned periodic control values • MA Pc Value ID: Identifies each result of a test in a periodic control case. 46. • MA Pc Case ID: Identifies each instance of a periodic control. You cannot share data between Clients. • MA Pc Test ID: Identifies each test done in a periodic control. You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.1 MA Periodic Control This tab is used for periodic control definition. • MA Periodic Control ID: Identifies a periodic control. There are also stored the results of the tests for the different sets. 385/461 . • TestResult: Description of the test results. 46. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.46 Manufacturing: Periodic Control Periodic Control defines the diferent set of tests that can be defined to perform periodically. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

386/461 Figure 46: Manufacturing: Periodic Control .

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.4 MA PC Case This tab contains each periodic control realized. 46. 387/461 . • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.3 MA PC Test This tab contains each of the test that conforms the periodic control • MA Pc Test ID: Identifies each test done in a periodic control. You cannot share data between Clients. • MA Pc Case ID: Identifies each instance of a periodic control. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients. • Days: Delay in days from the beginning of the case to perform the test. • MA Periodic Control ID: Identifies a periodic control. • Startdate: The Start Date indicates the first or starting date of a range.46. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • M Attributesetinstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • MA Periodic Control ID: Identifies a periodic control.

• Launched: Indicates that the case has been launched. 388/461 .• Enddate: The End Date indicates the last date in this range.

You cannot share data between Clients. • MA CCP Group ID: Identifies a group of critical control points.2 MA CCP Group Allows the CCP grouping • MA CCP Group ID: Identifies a group of critical control points. • MA Ccp ID: Identifies each measured critical control point. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.47 Manufacturing: Critical Control Points Critical Control Points are points that are measured during productions. String or Number. • Critical: Indicates that the point is critical and/or mandatory • Valuetype: Set the value type expected for the point. Possible options are: Yes/No. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 389/461 . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.1 MA CCP This tab contains each of the measures that will be controled. • Valuenumber: Set the number of times that the point is measured each gathering. • Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records 47. 47.

390/461 Figure 47: Manufacturing: Critical Control Points .

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Ccp Group ID: Identifies a group of critical control points. You cannot share data between Clients. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Starttime: Start time in hours. Deprecated 47. Custom code. Available options are morning and swing shift 391/461 . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Ccp Shift ID: Identifies a time schedule in a shift of a critical control point group. • Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records • Hassecproduct: Indicates that the group has a secondary product. • Endtime: End time in hours. • Shift: Indicates the shift when the group is going to be measured. • Frecuency: Time period between measure gathering.3 MA CCP Shift Defines the intervals where the control points are measured for each shift. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients.

You cannot share data between Clients. Deprecated 47. • MA CCP Group ID: Identifies a group of critical control points. Custom code. You cannot share data between Clients. Custom code. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Lot: The Lot Number indicates the specific lot that a product was part of. Available options are morning and swing shift • Measuredate: Date when the measures are taken.4 MA Measure Group This tab contains the CCP data registered on this group • MA Measure Group ID: Indicates the groups that are measured in the measure shift. • MA Measure Shift ID: Indicates a measure shift of critical control points. Custom code. • Shift: Indicates the shift when the group is going to be measured.5 MA Measure Shift This tab defines the shift and date in which the gathering is done • MA Measure Shift ID: Indicates a measure shift of critical control points. • Product: Is the product that is being measured. Deprecated • Product: Is the product that is being measured.47. Deprecated • Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records • Hassecproduct: Indicates that the group has a secondary product. Custom code. Deprecated 392/461 . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

• MA Measure Group ID: Indicates the groups that are measured in the measure shift. 47. • MA Measure Time ID: Identifies the time of the data gathering. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed.6 MA Measure Time This tab defines the time of the gathering. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 393/461 . 47. Deprecated • Observation: Observations occurred during the process or operation. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • Edit: Edit measures of CCP • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed.7 MA Measure Values In this table gathering values are registered. • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. • MA Measure Values ID: Identifies each value measured in a measure time. • Measurehour: Time when the gathering was made. You cannot share data between Clients. • Explode: Process to insert all the necessary measure values of the measured group.• Sellbydate: Custom code.

String or Number. • V Char: Yes/No result of the measure. You cannot share data between Clients. • Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records 394/461 . • V Number: Result of the measure in numeric format. • Valuetype: Set the value type expected for the point.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Ccp ID: Identifies each measured critical control point. • MA Measure Time ID: Identifies the time of the data gathering. • V String: Result of the measure in text format. Possible options are: Yes/No.

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Plannedtime: Estimated time for the operation. They are escheduled and in the maintenance part are stored the results of the maintenances. You cannot share data between Clients. available options are corrective. • MA Maint Operation ID: Identifies a maintenance operation. • MA Machine Type ID: Identifies a machine type. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Explode: Indicates that the maintenance defined for a machine group is exploded to all its machines when is scheduled. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 395/461 . • MA Machine ID: Indicates a machine of the enterprise. • Maintenance Type: Sets the maintenance type.48 Manufacturing: Maintenance Maintenances can be set for machines and machine types.1 MA Maintenance Stores maintenances that are done to the machines. • MA Maintenance ID: Identifies a maintenance of a machine or machine type. 48. corrective (urgent) and preventive. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.

396/461 Figure 48: Manufacturing: Maintenance .

48. You cannot share data between Clients. 397/461 . If you leave the field empty. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 48. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. the system will generate a document number for you. C Order). • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. If the document is not saved. • Partdate: Date of the part. You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.g.2 MA Maint Operation Stores the maintenance operations that can be done.3 MA Maint Part In this table are stored all the maintenance parts. • MA Maint Operation ID: Identifies a maintenance operation. • MA Maint Part ID: Identifies a maintenance part. the field is empty if you create a new document. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. Available options are morning and swing shift • CreateMaint: Process to insert in the part the scheduled maintenances. • Shift: Indicates the shift when the group is going to be measured.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined.

• MA Maint Scheduled ID: Identifies a scheduled maintenance. 398/461 . • Excludeweekend: Exclude weekends from the calculation results. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.5 MA Maint Scheduled Scheduled maintenances. Here there are all the maintenances done in the application. • MA Maint Periodicity ID: Identifies a periodicity defined for a maintenance. You cannot share data between Clients.4 MA Maint Periodicity Periodicities of the maintenances defined for machines and machine types. those generated by the maintenance periodicity or manually inserted. • Periodicity Type: Sets the correspondent periodicity type. 48. • Weekday: Day of the week • Monthday: Day of the month • Shift: Indicates the shift when the group is going to be measured. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.48. • MA Maintenance ID: Identifies a maintenance of a machine or machine type. Available options are morning and swing shift • Initdate: Initial date. • MA Maint Part ID: Identifies a maintenance part. You cannot share data between Clients. • MA Maintenance ID: Identifies a maintenance of a machine or machine type.

• MA Machine Type ID: Identifies a machine type. • Shift: Indicates the shift when the group is going to be measured. • Scheduleddate: Scheduled date.6 MA Maint Worker Workers that take part in the scheduled maintenances. • Observation: Observations occurred during the process or operation. 399/461 . available options are corrective. • Confirmed: Indicates that the maintenance schedule has been confirmed. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Available options are morning and swing shift • Result: The Result indicates the result of any action taken on this request. • MA Maint Operation ID: Identifies a maintenance operation. • M Internal Consumption ID: Identifies an internal consumption of products. corrective (urgent) and preventive. • Usedtime: Used time in hours. • Maintenance Type: Sets the maintenance type. 48. You cannot share data between Clients.• MA Machine ID: Indicates a machine of the enterprise. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • MA Maint Worker ID: Identifies a worker that takes part on a maintenance part.

Employee or Salesperson 400/461 . Customer. This can include Vendor. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.• MA Maint Part ID: Identifies a maintenance part.

2 MA Machine Cost Machine costing information during time periods. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. the system automatically creates a numeric number.49 Manufacturing: Machine In machine and machine type all machines of the application are defined with the correspondent costs and maintenance schedules.1 MA Machine In this tab is defined each machine of the enterprise. 49. • Usecycle: Indicates the number of years that it’s useful • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 49. If you leave the search key empty. Not implemented yet • MA Machine Type ID: Identifies a machine type. • MA Costcenter ID: Identifies a cost center. • MA Machine ID: Indicates a machine of the enterprise. Work Station defines the work stations and the processes. • MA Machine Cost ID: 401/461 .g. machines and toolset types that forms part of it. • Purchaseyear: Indicates the purchase year. You cannot share data between Clients. C Order).

402/461 Figure 49: Manufacturing: Machine .

• Validfrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range • Costuom: Unit of Measure for cost • Purchaseamt: Purchase amount. • Dayhours: Working hours per day • Improductivehoursyear: Total no productive hours per year. • Toolsetamt: Total amount of the toolsets.3 MA Machinestation In this table are assigned to each station the correspondent machines. • Yearvalue: • Daysyear: Working days per year. You cannot share data between Clients. • Cost: Cost amount. • MA Machinestation ID: Machine Station 403/461 . • Amortization: Amortization amount. • Consume: Not implemented yet • Costuomyear: 49.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Machine ID: Indicates a machine of the enterprise.

You cannot share data between Clients. 404/461 . • MA Machine ID: Indicates a machine of the enterprise. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 49. You cannot share data between Clients. • MA Machine Type ID: Identifies a machine type.4 MA Machine Type In this table are stored the used machine types to group similar machines. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • MA Workstation ID: Indicates a Work Station of the enterprise. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

• MA Costcenter Version ID: Identifies a cost center version valid during a time period. 50. You cannot share data between Clients. • MA Costcenter Ic ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 405/461 . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. C Order).g. • MA Indirect Cost ID: Indicates an indirect cost. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. If you leave the search key empty. • MA Costcenter ID: Identifies a cost center. You cannot share data between Clients. Not implemented yet • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. • Cost: Cost amount.2 MA CostCenter In this table is configured each cost center. the system automatically creates a numeric number. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.1 MA Costcenter IC Indirect costs associated to each cost center.50 Manufacturing: Cost Center In cost center is defined the cost centers of the enterprise with the machines. 50. salary categories and indirect costs.

406/461 Figure 50: Manufacturing: Cost Center .

• MA Costcenter Employee ID: Identifies a salary category of a cost center. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MA Costcenter Version ID: Identifies a cost center version valid during a time period.• Bydefault: When calculated is checked determines how is calculated the cost center use. • C Salary Category ID: Indicates a salary category • Quantity: Indicates the quantity of product needed to process one time the sequence. • MA Costcenter Version ID: Identifies a cost center version valid during a time period. • Calculated: Indicates that the record has been calculated. • MA Costcenter Machine ID: Identifies a machine associated to a cost center. 407/461 .3 MA Costcenter Employee Salary categories and employee number of each category of the cost center. When is by default the data is taken from the work requirement phase. You cannot share data between Clients. You cannot share data between Clients. • Costuom: Unit of Measure for cost 50. when not from the work effort header.4 MA CostCenter Machine Machines associated to a cost center. • Costuom: Unit of Measure for cost Not implemented yet 50. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). C Order). the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined.5 MA Costcenter Version Cost center version valid during a time period. • Cost: Cost amount. the system will generate a document number for you. • MA Costcenter ID: Identifies a cost center. You cannot share data between Clients. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. the field is empty if you create a new document. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. If you leave the field empty. • MA Costcenter Version ID: Identifies a cost center version valid during a time period.• MA Machine ID: Indicates a machine of the enterprise. If the document is not saved. • Use: Indicates the use coefficient. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 50. • Costuom: Unit of Measure for cost • Validfrom: The Valid From date indicates the first day of a date range 408/461 .g.

You cannot share data between Clients.51 Manufacturing: Indirect Cost Indirect costs are costs added to the manufacturing costs. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. production in each product and structure only to final product that is sold.1 MA Indirect Cost Indirect costs of a product. • Datefrom: The Date From indicates the starting date of a range. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 51. You cannot share data between Clients. • Cost Type: The cost type defines when the cost is added to the product. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • MA Indirect Cost ID: Indicates an indirect cost. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.2 MA Indirect Cost Value Cost values of the indirect cost during a time period • MA Indirect Cost Value ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Dateto: The Date To indicates the end date of a range (inclusive) 409/461 . • MA Indirect Cost ID: Indicates an indirect cost. 51.

410/461 Figure 51: Manufacturing: Indirect Cost .

• Cost Uom: Unit of Measure for cost • Calculated: Indicates that the record has been calculated. 411/461 .• Total: Total amount • Cost: Cost amount. • Calculate: Process to calculate the cost when the total amount is given.

1 MA Incidence The Work incidence table is used to describe incidences. You cannot share data between Clients. • Strtime: Start time in hours. 412/461 . • MA Incidence ID: Unique identifier for incidence • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 52. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.52 Manufacturing: Incidence The incidences are used in the work effort to store the work incidences.

413/461 Figure 52: Manufacturing: Incidence .

You cannot share data between Clients. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. the system automatically creates a numeric number. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. In Work stations are introduced the diferent work stations. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. • MA Workstation ID: Indicates a Work Station of the enterprise. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. C Order). • MA Cc Idprep: Not implemented yet • MA Cc Idwork: Not implemented yet • MA Costcenter ID: Identifies a cost center. 53. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 414/461 . With the stations there are indicated the diferent machines that compose it. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. If you leave the search key empty.1 MA Process In this table are described the diferent process that are done in the work station.53 Manufacturing: Work Station In Section are introduced the diferent sections of manufacturing that exists in the enterprise. • MA Process ID: Indicates a manufacturing process of the enterprise.g. the processes that are done in the station and the toolsets used in each process.

415/461 Figure 53: Manufacturing: Work Station .

3 MA Workstation In this table it’s defined the work station. • MA Section ID: Indicates a section of the enterprise. You cannot share data between Clients. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. C Order). If you leave the search key empty. • MA Workstation ID: Indicates a Work Station of the enterprise. 53. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.53.g. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.2 MA Section In section table it’s defined each section. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. It’s indicated to which section belongs and the GFHs of preparations and work. 416/461 . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. the system automatically creates a numeric number. • MA Section ID: Indicates a section of the enterprise.

54 Salary Category Salary categories are the different cost ranges of the employees. • C Salary Category Cost ID: Identifies a cost of a salary category during a time period. 54. You cannot share data between Clients. 54. 54. 54.1 C Salary Category Salary categories for employees.2 C Salary Category Cost Costs of a salary categories. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 417/461 . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght.5 C Salary Category Salary categories for employees.4 C Salary Category Cost Costs of a salary categories. • C Salary Category ID: Indicates a salary category 54. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.3 C Salary Category Salary categories for employees.

418/461 Figure 54: Salary Category .

10 C Salary Category C Salary Category Cost Salary categories for employees.9 54.6 C Salary Category Cost Costs of a salary categories. • Cost: Cost amount.7 C Salary Category Salary categories for employees.54.8 C Salary Category Cost Costs of a salary categories. • Costuom: Unit of Measure for cost 419/461 . • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Datefrom: The Date From indicates the starting date of a range. 54. 54. • C Salary Category ID: Indicates a salary category 54. Costs of a salary categories.

1 MRP SalesForecast In this table are stored the expected sales. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.2 MRP SalesForecastLine In this table are stored the expected sale lines. It may or may not be the same as the accounting date. Customer.55 MRP Manufacturing planification plans the work requirements necessaries for the expected material requirements. Planning method defines the different data that is taking into account in the planifications. Employee or Salesperson • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. 55. You cannot share data between Clients. 420/461 . • Datedoc: The Document Date indicates the date the document was generated. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • MRP Salesforecast ID: Identifier of an expected sales header. Sales forecast are the expected sales for a time period. This can include Vendor. • MRP Salesforecast ID: Identifier of an expected sales header. 55. Purchase planifications plans the necessaries purchase orders. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. • MRP Salesforecastline ID: Identifies an expected sale line. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

421/461 Figure 55: MRP .

• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Isproduction: Sets the record id for production. You cannot share data between Clients. • MRP Planningmethod ID: Identifies a method for filtering the input for planning processes.• Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. 55. • Ispurchase: Sets the record id for purchase.4 MRP PlanningMethod The planning method sets the inputs that are taken into account for the planning processes. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. You cannot share data between Clients. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.3 MRP Planner Planner of the MRP • MRP Planner ID: Identifies a planner of the MRP. 55. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Dateplanned: Expected date of the transaction. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. 422/461 . • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.

• Daysto: Number of days from the main date to the end of the period. in so much per one. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • MRP Planningmethodline ID: Identifies a filter option for the input types of the planning methods. 423/461 . • Line: Indicates the unique line for a document. 55. It will also control the display order of the lines within a document. You cannot share data between Clients. 55. • Weighting: Percentage of the transaction that is used. • Daysfrom: Number of days from the main date to the begining of the period. You cannot share data between Clients.5 MRP PlanningMethodLine The planning method line sets the filter options for the input types of the planning methods. • Inouttrxtype: Transaction types available for the MRP. • MRP Planningmethod ID: Identifies a method for filtering the input for planning processes. • MRP Run Production ID: Headers of the production planning processes.• Description: A description is limited to 255 characters.6 MRP Run Production Headers of the production planning processes. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

• Securitymargin: Margin in days between the different transactions. Product categories are used for pricing. • Datedoc: The Document Date indicates the date the document was generated. • Launchwr: Process to generate work requirements. Employee or Salesperson • Timehorizon: Time horizon in number of days for the planning process. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Customer. • MRP Planner ID: Identifies a planner of the MRP. This can include Vendor. It may or may not be the same as the accounting date. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • C Bp Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners. 424/461 . • Simulate: Process to run the production planning process. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Recalculatestock: Process to recalculate the product quantities of the lines. • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. • Launchmr: Process to generate material requirements.

• Parent ID: The Parent indicates the value used to represent a summary level or report to level for a record • Inouttrxtype: Transaction types available for the MRP. • MRP Salesforecastline ID: Identifies an expected sale line.7 MRP Run ProductionLine Lines of the production planning processes. • MRP Run Productionline ID: Identifies a line of the production planning processes. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. 425/461 . • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. • MRP Run Production ID: Headers of the production planning processes.55. • Isfixed: Is fixed • C Orderline ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. • Neededqty: Quantity needed • Planneddate: Planned date of the transaction. • M Requisitionline ID: Identifies each product required to purchase in a requisition • MA Processplan ID: Indicates a process plan. You cannot share data between Clients. • MA Workrequirement ID: Indicates a work requirement.

• AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Isplanned: Is planned. • MRP Planner ID: Identifies a planner of the MRP. • Recalculatestock: Process to recalculate the product quantities of the lines.• Isexploded: The line has been exploded. • Datedoc: The Document Date indicates the date the document was generated. • Cumqty: Cumulate quantity.8 MRP Run Purchase Headers of the purchase planning processes. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • Plannedorderdate: Planned date to order the transaction. 55. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. 426/461 . • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. • Vendor ID: Identifies a business partner that is a vendor. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Product categories are used for pricing. You cannot share data between Clients. • MRP Run Purchase ID: Identifies a header of the purchase planning processes. It may or may not be the same as the accounting date.

• C Bp Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners. • Neededqty: Quantity needed • Planneddate: Planned date of the transaction. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Securitymargin: Margin in days between the different transactions. • MRP Run Purchase ID: Identifies a header of the purchase planning processes. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. • MRP Run Purchaseline ID: Identifies a line of the purchase planning processes. This can include Vendor. • Launchpo: Process to generate purchase orders. • Simulate: Process to run the production planning process. 427/461 . You cannot share data between Clients. Employee or Salesperson • Timehorizon: Time horizon in number of days for the planning process. • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. 55.9 MRP Run PurchaseLine Lines of the purchase planning processes. Customer. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • Recalculatestock: Process to recalculate the product quantities of the lines.

• MA Workrequirement ID: Indicates a work requirement. Customer. • MRP Salesforecastline ID: Identifies an expected sale line. 428/461 . • M Requisitionline ID: Identifies each product required to purchase in a requisition • Iscompleted: Line completed • Plannedorderdate: Planned date to order the transaction.• Inouttrxtype: Transaction types available for the MRP. This can include Vendor. • Isfixed: Is fixed • C Orderline ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. Employee or Salesperson • Cumqty: Cumulate quantity. • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact.

You cannot share data between Clients. any Locators for that Warehouse and the Accounting parameters to be used for inventory in that Warehouse. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Warehouse and Locators defines each Warehouse.56 Warehouse services Business Partner allows you do define any party with whom you transact. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.1 M Locator Type Contains all the differents types for a locator • M Locator Type ID: The ID identifies the unique type for the locator • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients.2 M WH Schedule Contains all the differents schedules for a warehouse. This includes customers. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. These schedules are used to invoice rented locators • M WH Schedule ID: The warehouse schedule ID identifies a unique schedule for renting locators. 429/461 . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. 56. • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • Sizemultiplier: 56. vendors and employees.

430/461 Figure 56: Warehouse services .

• Invoicingtype: How to invoice a locator is being renting 56.4 M WH Period Contains all the periods for the schedule • M WH Period ID: The ID identifies a unique period for the warehouse schedule • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. • M WH Schedule ID: The warehouse schedule ID identifies a unique schedule for renting locators. (E. You cannot share data between Clients. You cannot share data between Clients. monthly) • Generateperiods: A button that generates periods depending on two dates • Activateperiods: 56. • StartDate: The Start Date indicates the first or starting date of a range.3 M WH Schedule Product Contains all the differents product that will be used in the invoices • M WH Schedule Product ID: The ID idenitfies a unique product for the warehouse shedule • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.g: every two weeks. • M WH Schedule ID: The warehouse schedule ID identifies a unique schedule for renting locators. 431/461 .• Periodicity: Regular intervals. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.

• EndDate: The End Date indicates the last date in this range. Employee or Salesperson • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. • Invoicingmode: Invoicing Mode 432/461 . 56.6 M InOutLine Type Contains all the periods for a warehouse • M Inoutline Type ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 56. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Customer. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • M WH Period ID: The ID identifies a unique period for the warehouse schedule • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. You cannot share data between Clients.5 M WH Period Invoiced Contains all the invoices generated due based on the rented locators for that period • M WH Period Invoiced ID: The ID identifies a unique period invoiced for the the period • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. This can include Vendor.

• IN Product ID: Identifies a service due to material receipts • OUT Product ID: Identifies a service due to shipments out 433/461 .

• C Doctype ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules 434/461 . The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. 57. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. the system automatically creates a numeric number. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. Maintain your Resources.1 C ExternalPOS External Point of Sales • C Externalpos ID: External Point of Sales • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. etc. defining margins and for easily assigning different accounting parameters for products. Update Name. These groups can be used in generating Price Lists. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record.57 External POS External Point of Sales defines the different used POS and the products that can sale. Product defines all products used by an organization. C Order). in the Resource and don’t change it in the product. These products include those sold to customers. • M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. The Product Category allows you to define different groups of products.g. The product for the resource is automatically created and synchronized. You cannot share data between Clients. used in the manufacture of products sold to customers and products purchased by an organization. If you leave the search key empty. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. Unit of Measure.

435/461 Figure 57: External POS .

• M Shipper ID: The Shipper is any entity which will provide shipping to or shipping from an Organization. Product categories are used for pricing. margin and cost of items purchased or sold.• C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. You cannot share data between Clients. 436/461 . Customer. Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. • Salesrep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. This can include Vendor. • Include Product Category: If it is checked the selected categories will be included else they will be excluded. • C Externalpos ID: External Point of Sales • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. • Include Product: If it is checked the selected products will be included else they will be excluded.2 C ExternalPOS Category Product Categories • C Externalpos Category ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. 57. Employee or Salesperson • M Pricelist ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing.

The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • DocumentNote: The Document Note is used for recording any additional information regarding this product. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. You cannot share data between Clients. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.57. 437/461 . • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. the system automatically creates a numeric number.g. The Location is the default location when receiving the stored products. • C Externalpos ID: External Point of Sales • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • Help: The Help field contains a hint. C Order). • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. comment or help about the use of this item.4 M Product Defines each product and identifies it for use in price lists and orders. You cannot share data between Clients. 57. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName.3 C ExternalPOS Product Products • C Externalpos Product ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. If you leave the search key empty.

EAN-8. and Pharmacode) • SKU: The SKU indicates a user defined stock keeping unit. POSTNET and FIM. ISBN. ITF-14. • IsVerified: The Verified check box indicates if the configuration of this product has been verified. Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. UPC (E).• UPC: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar. Code 93. Code 128. • IsSold: The Sold check box indicates if this product is sold by this organization. JAN-13. • IsBOM: The Bill of Materials check box indicates if this product consists of a bill of materials. EAN-13. • IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. Code 25. • IsPurchased: The Purchased check box indicates if this product is purchased by this organization. ISSN. Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. Code 39. It may be used for an additional bar code symbols or your own schema. UPC (A). • IsPickListPrintDetails: The Print Details on Pick List indicates that the BOM element products will print on the Pick List as opposed to this product. MSI/Plessey. JAN-8. • IsInvoicePrintDetails: The Print Details on Invoice indicates that the BOM element products will print on the Invoice as opposed to this product. This is used for products that consist of a bill of materials 438/461 . ITF. • IsStocked: The Stocked check box indicates if this product is stocked by this Organization.

• C RevenueRecognition ID: The Revenue Recognition indicates how revenue will be recognized for this product • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. For example. Sales Tax or Value Added Tax. • DiscontinuedBy: The Discontinued By indicates the individual who discontinued this product 439/461 . Product categories are used for pricing. • C TaxCategory ID: The Tax Category provides a method of grouping similar taxes. • Volume: The Volume indicates the volume of the product in the Volume UOM of the Client • Weight: The Weight indicates the weight of the product in the Weight UOM of the Client • ShelfWidth: The Shelf Width indicates the width dimension required on a shelf for a product • ShelfHeight: The Shelf Height indicates the height dimension required on a shelf for a product • ShelfDepth: The Shelf Depth indicates the depth dimension required on a shelf for a product • UnitsPerPallet: The Units per Pallet indicates the number of units of this product which fit on a pallet. • S Resource ID: The ID identifies a unique resource Not implemented yet • Discontinued: The Discontinued check box indicates a product that has been discontinued. • Classification: The Classification can be used to optionally group products.

• Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. You need to define a Attribute Set if you want to enable Serial and Lot Number tracking. • S ExpenseType ID: Expense report type • ProductType: The type of product also determines accounting consequences. This can include Vendor. • AD Image ID: Defines a system image • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. but retrieved at runtime. • DescriptionURL: URL for the description • GuaranteeDays: If the value is 0. • M AttributeSetInstance ID: The values of the actual Product Attributes • DownloadURL: Semicolon separated list of URLs to be downloaded or distributed • M FreightCategory ID: Freight Categories are used to calculate the Freight for the Shipper selected • M Locator ID: The Locator ID indicates where in a Warehouse a product is located. Employee or Salesperson 440/461 . • ImageURL: URL of image. Customer. there is no limit to the availability or guarantee. otherwise the guarantee date is calculated by adding the days to the delivery date. The image can be a gif. • VersionNo: Version Number Not implemented yet • M AttributeSet ID: Define Product Attribute Sets to add additional attributes and values to the product. jpeg or png. • R MailText ID: The Mail Template indicates the mail template for return messages. The image is not stored in the database.

• Ispriceprinted: It allows you to print or not the price of a product in a document so you can summary many products in just one. Deprecated • Greenpoint Uom: Custom code. Deprecated • Upc2: Custom code. • MA Producttype ID: • Production: A product that is used for production plans 441/461 . Deprecated • Calculated: Indicates that the record has been calculated. • MA Processplan ID: Indicates a process plan. • Name2: Additional Name • Costtype: Different types of cost • Coststd: The value of the standard cost • Stock Min: Minimum stock of a product Not implemented yet • Enforce Attribute: For differing the stock of a product by the attribute Not implemented yet • Bundle Uom: Custom code.

The Import Products is an interim table which is used when importing external data into the system. XML. tab delimited. Selecting the ’Process’ button will either add or modify the appropriate records. 58.58 Import data Allows the bank statement import configuration and its execution The Import Business Partner is an interim table which is used when importing external data into the system. 442/461 . • AD Table ID: The Table indicates the table in which a field or fields reside. • FormatType: The Format is a drop down list box for selecting the format type (text. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. etc) of the file to be imported • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • AD ImpFormat ID: The ID identifies a unique import format • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. You cannot share data between Clients. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. Selecting the ’Process’ button will either add or modify the appropriate records. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. The Import Natural Account is an interim table which is used when importing external data into the system. The Import Loader Format is used for defining the file layout for product information which will be imported. Selecting the ’Process’ button will either add or modify the appropriate records.1 AD ImpFormat The Import Format tab contains each record parameter configuration for each data import type.

443/461 Figure 58: Import data .

then Function Name 444/461 .2 AD ImpFormat Row Define the individual field based on the table definition. SE /SL /UE /UL . • AD Column ID: Link to the database column of the table • StartNo: The Start Number indicates the starting position in the line or field number in the line • EndNo: • DataType: • DataFormat: The Date Format indicates how dates are defined on the record to be imported.1st: System/User. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. you need to enclose it like ’this’) • AD ImpFormat Row ID: The ID identifies a unique format field • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Please note that you have to make sure that a Constant has the correct SQL data type (i. It must be in Java Notation • DecimalPoint: Decimal Point in the data file • DivideBy100: Divide number by 100 to get correct amount • ConstantValue: Constant value • Callout: Function Calls separated by semicolons. if it is a ’string’.e. 2nd: Enter/Leave. • AD ImpFormat ID: The ID identifies a unique import format • SeqNo: The Sequence indicates the order of records • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. . You cannot share data between Clients. 3rd: Underscore.58.

This can include Vendor. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. the system automatically creates a numeric number. Employee or Salesperson • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. If before inserting it doesn’t exists in the table C BP Group. If you leave the search key empty. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName.g.3 I BPartner The import business partner is an interin table which is used when importing external data into the system • I BPartner ID: The ID identifies a unique business partner to import • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.For details see www. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • NAICS: The NAICS/SIC identifies either of these codes that may be applicable to this Business Partner.htm • TaxID: The Tax ID field identifies the legal Identification number of this Entity. • GroupValue: The value of the business partner group.dnb. Customer. This value is the short name for the group. C Order). You cannot share data between Clients. • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key.com/dunsno/list. it won’t work 445/461 .• Script: Use Java language constructs to define the result of the calculation 58. • Name2: Additional Name • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • DUNS: Used for EDI .

if appropriate. • CountryCode: For details . • C Region ID: The Region identifies a unique Region for this Country. • RegionName: The Region Name defines the name that will print when this region is used in a document. apartment number or similar information.org/trade/rec/rec03en.http://www. Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document. any additional Postal Code information.din. • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • Address1: The Address 1 identifies the address for an entity’s location • Address2: The Address 2 provides additional address information for an entity.html or . • C Country ID: The Country defines a Country. • Postal: The Postal Code field identifies the postal code for this entity’s address.unece. 446/461 . It can be used for building location. • ContactName: Business Partner Contact Name • ContactDescription: Description of Contact • Comments: The Comments field allows for free form entry of additional information.de/gremien/nas/nabd/iso3166ma/codlstp1.htm • Title: The Title indicates the name that an entity is referred to as.http://www. • Postal Add: The Additional ZIP or Postal Code identifies. • City: The City identifies a unique City for this Country or Region.• C BP Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners.

• AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system. Openbravo checks the Unit of Measure (default if not set). the Product Category (default if not set). • Fax: The Fax identifies a facsimile number for this Business Partner or Location • Email: The Email Address is the Electronic Mail ID for this User and should be fully qualified (e. the uniquen 447/461 . • Birthday: Birthday or Anniversary day • C Greeting ID: The Greeting identifies the greeting to print on correspondence. 58. joe. This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • I ErrorMsg: The Import Error Message displays any error messages generated during the import process. the Product Type (only Items and Services).• Phone: The Phone field identifies a telephone number • Phone2: The 2nd Phone field identifies an alternate telephone number.com). • I IsImported: The Imported check box indicates if this import has been processed.4 I Product Before importing. the Business Partner. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • Password: The Password indicates the Password for this User Id.g. • BPContactGreeting: Greeting for Business Partner Contact • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. the Currency (defaults to accounting currency if not set). Passwords are required to identify authorized users.smith@company.

• Help: The Help field contains a hint. You cannot share data between Clients. C Order). where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. ISSN. EAN-8. JAN-8. Code 128. It may be used for an additional bar code symbols or your own schema. • X12DE355: The Unit of Measure Code indicates the EDI X12 Code Data Element 355 (Unit or Basis for Measurement) • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure 448/461 . • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • UPC: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. ISBN. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. and Pharmacode) • SKU: The SKU indicates a user defined stock keeping unit. EAN-13.• I Product ID: The ID identifies a unique product • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. Code 25. comment or help about the use of this item. • DocumentNote: The Document Note is used for recording any additional information regarding this product. ITF-14. Code 39. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. POSTNET and FIM. If you leave the search key empty.g. UPC (E). JAN-13. Code 93. ITF. the system automatically creates a numeric number. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. UPC (A). MSI/Plessey.

• Volume: The Volume indicates the volume of the product in the Volume UOM of the Client • Weight: The Weight indicates the weight of the product in the Weight UOM of the Client • ShelfWidth: The Shelf Width indicates the width dimension required on a shelf for a product • ShelfHeight: The Shelf Height indicates the height dimension required on a shelf for a product • ShelfDepth: The Shelf Depth indicates the depth dimension required on a shelf for a product • UnitsPerPallet: The Units per Pallet indicates the number of units of this product which fit on a pallet. • Classification: The Classification can be used to optionally group products. The image can be a gif. jpeg or png. • ProductType: The type of product also determines accounting consequences. • DiscontinuedBy: The Discontinued By indicates the individual who discontinued this product • ImageURL: URL of image. 449/461 . If before inserting it doesn’t exists in the table M Product Category Id. but retrieved at runtime.• ProductCategory Value: The value of the product category. This value is the short name for the group. • Discontinued: The Discontinued check box indicates a product that has been discontinued. it won’t work • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. Product categories are used for pricing. The image is not stored in the database.

450/461 . This value goes rigth to the field Search key on the window Business partner • C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. • Order Pack: The Order Pack Quantity indicates the number of units in each pack of this product. • RoyaltyAmt: • PriceEffective: The Price Effective indicates the date this price is for. Customer.org/trade/rec/rec09en.unece.htm • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • PriceList: The List Price is the official List Price in the document currency. • VendorCategory: The Vendor Category identifies the category used by the vendor for this product. This can include Vendor.• DescriptionURL: URL for the description • BPartner Value: The value or short name for the business partner. • PricePO: The PO Price indicates the price for a product per the purchase order. This allows you to enter future prices for products which will become effective when appropriate. Employee or Salesperson • ISO Code: For details . • Manufacturer: Manufacturer • Order Min: The Minimum Order Quantity indicates the smallest quantity of this product which can be ordered.http://www. • VendorProductNo: The Vendor Product Number identifies the number used by the vendor for this product.

• I IsImported: The Imported check box indicates if this import has been processed. • ElementName: • C ElementValue ID: Account Elements can be natural accounts or user defined values. These are commonly known as a Chart of Accounts. • I ErrorMsg: The Import Error Message displays any error messages generated during the import process. • DeliveryTime Promised: The Promised Delivery Time indicates the number of days between the order date and the date that delivery was promised. 58. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed.g. 451/461 . • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo TableName. • C Element ID: The Account Element uniquely identifies an Account Type. • Value: A search key allows you a fast method of finding a particular record. If you leave the search key empty. the system automatically creates a numeric number. You cannot share data between Clients. C Order).• CostPerOrder: The Cost Per Order indicates the fixed charge levied when an order for this product is placed.5 I ElementValue This process imports the accounting accounts tree into the organization • I ElementValue ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.

Summary entities are used for reporting and do not have own values. • IsDocControlled: • IsSummary: A summary entity represents a branch in a tree rather than an end-node. • PostStatistical: • PostEncumbrance: • Default Account: • AD Column ID: Link to the database column of the table 452/461 . validating payables and receivables for business partners.Memo. • ParentValue: • ParentElementValue ID: • PostActual: The Post Actual indicates if actual values can be posted to this element value. if any are applicable.Expense. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • PostBudget: The Post Budget indicates if budget values can be posted to this element value. The account type is used to determine what taxes.Liability.Asset. Note: Memo account amounts are ignored when checking for balancing • AccountSign: Indicates if the expected balance for this account should be a Debit or a Credit. L . The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. E .• Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. • AccountType: Valid account types are A .Owner Equity. R -Revenue and M. O.

Any Sales Rep must be a valid internal user. The best way is to set the Document Type Name as a Constant in your Import File Format or as an imported fi • I Order ID: • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity.• Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • I ErrorMsg: The Import Error Message displays any error messages generated during the import process. • AD OrgTrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). • I IsImported: The Imported check box indicates if this import has been processed. 453/461 . The Document Type is on purpose not fully derived as it has too many consequences if it’s wrong. • I IsImported: The Imported check box indicates if this import has been processed. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. • I ErrorMsg: The Import Error Message displays any error messages generated during the import process. with centralized services. You cannot share data between Clients. and inter-organization transactions. • SalesRep ID: The Sales Representative indicates the Sales Rep for this Region. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record.6 I Order You should supply the Document Type Name (or ID). The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed. 58.

• C BPartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. 454/461 . apartment number or similar information. Customer. • C BPartner Location ID: The Partner address indicates the location of a Business Partner • BillTo ID: The Bill/Invoice To indicates the address to use when remitting bills • C Location ID: The Location / Address field defines the location of an entity. • Address1: The Address 1 identifies the address for an entity’s location • Address2: The Address 2 provides additional address information for an entity. Employee or Salesperson • BPartnerValue: • Name: The name of an entity (record) is used as an default search option in addition to the search key. The name is up to 60 characters in lenght. • M PriceList ID: Price Lists are used to determine the pricing. It can be used for building location. • Postal: The Postal Code field identifies the postal code for this entity’s address. margin and cost of items purchased or sold. • IsSOTrx: The Sales Transaction checkbox indicates if this item is a Sales Transaction. • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • M Shipper ID: The Shipper is any entity which will provide shipping to or shipping from an Organization.• M Warehouse ID: The Warehouse identifies a unique Warehouse where products are stored or Services are provided. This can include Vendor.

htm • AD User ID: The User identifies a unique user in the system.html or .smith@company.http://www. 455/461 .com). This could be an internal user or a business partner contact • ContactName: Business Partner Contact Name • Email: The Email Address is the Electronic Mail ID for this User and should be fully qualified (e.g. • C Country ID: The Country defines a Country.org/trade/rec/rec03en.de/gremien/nas/nabd/iso3166ma/codlstp1.din.• City: The City identifies a unique City for this Country or Region. joe. Each Country must be defined before it can be used in any document. • C Region ID: The Region identifies a unique Region for this Country.http://www. • CountryCode: For details . • RegionName: The Region Name defines the name that will print when this region is used in a document.unece. • Phone: The Phone field identifies a telephone number • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • C DocType ID: The Document Type determines document sequence and processing rules • DocTypeName: • C PaymentTerm ID: Payment Terms identify the method and timing of payment for this transaction.

• TaxIndicator: The Tax Indicator identifies the short name that will print on documents referencing this tax. the system will generate a document number for you. ISBN. Code 93. • C Tax ID: The Tax indicates the type of tax for this document line.g. the field is empty if you create a new document.• PaymentTermValue: Key of the Payment Term • C Order ID: The Sales Order ID is a unique identifier of a Sales Order. If you leave the field empty. • TaxAmt: The Tax Amount displays the total tax amount for a document. This is controlled by the document sequence for this document type. It may be used for an additional bar code symbols or your own schema. The document sequence used for this fallback number is defined in the Maintain Sequence window with the name DocumentNo ¡TableName¿. Code 25. This is for documents which usually have an external number (like vendor invoice). JAN-13. the preliminary number is displayed in ¡¿. • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization.If the document type of your document has no automatic document sequence defined. EAN-13. If the document is not saved. JAN-8. • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. • DocumentNo: The document number is usually automatically generated by the system and determined by the document type of the document. POSTNET and FIM. Code 128. MSI/Plessey. and Pharmacode) • SKU: The SKU indicates a user defined stock keeping unit. UPC (E). Code 39. 456/461 . UPC (A). ITF-14. C Order). where TableName is the actual name of the table (e. • ProductValue: • UPC: Use this field to enter the bar code for the product in any of the bar code symbologies (Codabar. ITF. EAN-8. • C OrderLine ID: The Sales Order Line is a unique identifier for a line in an order. ISSN.

• FreightAmt: The Freight Amount indicates the amount charged for Freight in the document currency. that an Order was promised for. You can then report based on a specific Campaign.• LineDescription: • C UOM ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • QtyOrdered: The Ordered Quantity indicates the quantity of a product that was ordered. • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. if any. Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign. • Billto Upc: • Bpartnerupc: • C Bpartner Location Upc: • Dateordered: Indicates the Date an item was ordered. • Datepromised: The Date Promised indicates the date. • PriceActual: The Actual or Unit Price indicates the Price for a product in source currency. • Order Referenceno: • Vendor Upc: 457/461 .

This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • C Currency ID: Indicates the Currency to be used when processing or reporting on this record • C Uom ID: The UOM defines a unique non monetary Unit of Measure • M Product ID: Identifies an item which is either purchased or sold in this organization. Customer. You cannot share data between Clients. • C Budgetline ID: The ID identifies a unique record • C Validcombination ID: The Combination identifies a valid combination of element which represent a GL account.7 I Budgetline Is an interin table which is used when external data into the system • I Budgetline ID: The ID identifies a unique record • AD Client ID: A Client is a company or a legal entity. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • C Period ID: The Period indicates an exclusive range of dates for a calendar. • Validcombinationident: The identifier for the account combination. • Periodident: The identifier for the Period. • Productident: The identifier for the Product. This can include Vendor. Employee or Salesperson • Partnerident: The identifier for the Partner. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • C Bpartner ID: A Business Partner is anyone with whom you transact. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier 458/461 .58.

This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • C Campaign ID: The Campaign defines a unique marketing program. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • C Activity ID: Activities indicate tasks that are performed and used to utilize Activity based Costing • Activityident: • Description: A description is limited to 255 characters. with centralized services. You can then report based on a specific Campaign. 459/461 . and inter-organization transactions. • Salesregionident: The identifier for the Sales region. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • C Project ID: Project ID is a user defined identifier for a Project • Projectident: The identifier for the Project. • Orgtrxident: The identifier for the Organization. • Campaignident: The identifier for the Campaign. • Seqno: The Sequence indicates the order of records • C Bp Group ID: The Business Partner Group ID provides a method of defining defaults to be used for individual Business Partners. The owning Organization may not be the transaction organization in a service bureau environment. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • C Salesregion ID: The Sales Region indicates a specific area of sales coverage.• AD Orgtrx ID: The organization which performs or initiates this transaction (for another organization). Projects can be associated with a pre defined Marketing Campaign.

Product categories are used for pricing.• Bpgroupident: The identifier for the business partner group. • I Isimported: The Imported check box indicates if this import has been processed. • Processing: When this field is set as ’Y’ a process is being performed on this record. • I Errormsg: The Import Error Message displays any error messages generated during the import process. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • M Product Category ID: Identifies the category which this product belongs to. • Amount: The Amount indicates the amount for this document line. • Currencyident: The identifier for the Currency. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier • C Budget ID: Used to define the anticipated costs of doing business • Qty: The Quantity indicates the number of a specific product or item for this document. This identifier is the result of all the columns that are marked as isidentifier 460/461 . • Prodcategoryident: The identifier for the product category. • Price: The Price indicates the Price for a product or service. • Processed: The Processed checkbox indicates that a document has been processed.

L. any redistribution of this work or any derivative work must maintain this copyright notice and.5/ es/ or send a letter to Creative Commons.openbravo. As attribution to the original author.c Openbravo S.org/licenses/by-sa/2. To view a copy of this license. 2007 This work is licensed under the Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 2. California 94305. visibly on all its pages. The most updated copy of this work may be obtained at http://www. visit http://creativecommons. the Openbravo logo. 559 Nathan Abbott Way.5 Spain License. USA. Stanford.com/docs/ 461/461 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful